JP6955257B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

It is equipped with a probability setting switch that can set the probability that the display state of the variable display device becomes a special display mode in multiple stages, and a setting information display device that notifies the player of setting information such as a probability value set by the probability setting switch. There is a game machine.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 10-85431

However, it is not possible to sufficiently improve the interest of the game.
In one aspect, the present invention aims to improve the enjoyment of the game.

In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine as shown below is provided. The gaming machine includes a main control device that makes it possible to set settings related to the game and performs game control, and a slave control device that performs effect control based on a command from the main control device. The slave control device has a first effect control unit capable of executing a suggestion effect suggesting a setting at a predetermined notification trigger based on a command, and a second effect control capable of executing a slave control effect different from the suggestion effect based on a command. The subordinate control effect based on the first command of the commands by executing the unit, the storage unit that stores the table data that defines the distribution of the subordinate control effect, and the first program that refers to the table data of one of the table data. Distribution of the subordinate control effect based on the second command different from the first command among the commands by executing the first control that controls the distribution of and the second program that is different from the first program that refers to the table data of 1. It is provided with a distribution control unit capable of executing a second control for controlling the above.

According to one embodiment, in the gaming machine, Ru can improve the interest of the game.

It is a perspective view which shows an example of the gaming machine of 1st Embodiment. It is a front view which shows an example of the game board of 1st Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the control system of the gaming machine of 1st Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the structure of the effect control device of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the collective display device of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) which shows the flowchart of the main process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure (the 2) which shows the flowchart of the main process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure (the 3) which shows the flowchart of the main process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the output processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the winning opening switch / state monitoring processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the probability setting value change processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the probability setting value confirmation processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the memory map of the game control device of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the payout command transmission process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the winning number counter area of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the start port switch monitoring process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the hard random number acquisition processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure start port 1 switch processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure start port 2 switch processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure hold information determination process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure 1 game processing of 1st Embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a flowchart of special figure 2 game processing of the first embodiment. FIG. 1 of the first embodiment is a diagram showing a flowchart of normal processing. FIG. 2 of the first embodiment is a diagram showing a flowchart of normal processing. FIG. 1 is a diagram (No. 1) showing a flowchart of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing of the first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a diagram (No. 2) showing a flowchart of a variation start process of the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram (No. 1) showing a flowchart of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing of the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram (No. 2) showing a flowchart of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing of the first embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) which shows the flowchart of the variation start information setting processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure (the 2) which shows the flowchart of the variation start information setting processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the high probability fluctuation number update process of 1st Embodiment. FIG. 1 is a diagram (No. 1) showing a flowchart of processing during fluctuation in the special figure 1 of the first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a diagram (No. 2) showing a flowchart of processing during fluctuation in the special figure 1 of the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram (No. 1) showing a flowchart of processing during fluctuation in the special figure 2 of the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram (No. 2) showing a flowchart of processing during fluctuation in the special figure 2 of the first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a process transition setting process 1 during display of the special figure 1 of the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a process transition setting process 1 during display of the special figure 2 of the first embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2 of 1st Embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a process transition setting process 2 during display of the special figure 2 of the first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a diagram (No. 1) showing a flowchart of processing during display of the special figure 1 of the first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a diagram (No. 2) showing a flowchart of processing during display of the special figure 1 of the first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a diagram (No. 3) showing a flowchart of processing during display of the special figure 1 of the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram (No. 1) showing a flowchart of processing during display of the special figure 2 of the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram (No. 2) showing a flowchart of processing during display of the special figure 2 of the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram (No. 3) showing a flowchart of processing during display of the special figure 2 of the first embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) which shows the flowchart of the external information editing process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure (the 2) which shows the flowchart of the external information editing process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the main processing in the effect control apparatus of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the reception command check processing in the effect control apparatus of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the received command analysis processing in the effect control apparatus of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the outline of the information disclosure function of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the information disclosure processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the setting screen of the 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the collection process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the collected data of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the aggregation process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the aggregated data of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of securing the minimum information amount in the aggregated data of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the output information editing process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the in-game disclosure processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) which shows an example of the information disclosure screen of the 1st Embodiment. It is a figure (the 2) which shows an example of the information disclosure screen of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the setting suggestion mode of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the non-game disclosure process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the in-game disclosure processing of the modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the variation display sequence of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect control unit of the variation display of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the combination of the control program of the effect control unit and the reference table group in the first half variation of the 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the combination of the control program of the effect control unit, and the reference table group in the sub-effect of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the combination of the control program and the reference table group in the first half variation execution control of the 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the control program and the table selection pattern in the first half variation of the 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the control program and the table selection pattern in the sub-effect of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the table data of the 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the first half effect distribution processing of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the normal loss processing of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the PB background change processing of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) which shows an example of the control program and the table selection pattern in the first half variation modified in the development process of the 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure (No. 2) which shows an example of the control program and the table selection pattern in the first half variation modified in the development process of the 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view (the 1) which shows an example of the gaming board of the gaming machine of 3rd Embodiment. It is a front view (No. 2) which shows an example of the gaming board of the gaming machine of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) which shows an example of the display screen displayed by the display device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the relationship between the item which appears from the baggage and its content in 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the relationship between the item appearing from the treasure box and the content thereof in 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure (the 2) which shows an example of the display screen displayed by the display device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure (the 3) which shows an example of the display screen displayed by the display device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure (the 4) which shows an example of the display screen displayed by the display device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect content performed when the push button is pressed and when the push button is not pressed in the pseudo continuous effect using the push button in the third embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the baggage setting processing in 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) which shows an example of the display screen displayed by the display device in the modification 1 of the 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure (the 2) which shows an example of the display screen displayed by the display device in the modification 1 of the 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen displayed by the display device in the modification 2 of the 3rd Embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of the effect in the modification 3 of the 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) which shows an example of the display screen displayed by the display device in the modification 3 of the 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure (No. 2) which shows an example of the display screen displayed by the display device in the modification 3 of the 3rd Embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram (No. 3) showing an example of a display screen displayed by the display device in the third modification of the third embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the decorative symbol in the modification 4 of the 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the symbol used in the game state in the modification 4 of the 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the comparison of the case of deriving "777" in the special figure 1 variation display game and the case of deriving "777" in the special figure 2 variation display game in the modification 4 of the third embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) which shows an example of the display screen displayed by the display device in the modification 4 of the 3rd Embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram (No. 2) showing an example of a display screen displayed by the display device in the fourth modification of the third embodiment. It is a figure which shows the symbol used in the game state in the modification 5 of the 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the comparison of two big hits in the modification 5 of the 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the transition of the symbol form of the decorative symbol in the variation display game of the modification 6 of the 3rd Embodiment.

Hereinafter, embodiments will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.
[First Embodiment]
First, the first embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing an example of the gaming machine of the first embodiment.

The gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is rotatably assembled to an outer frame (support frame) 11. The game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is housed in a storage portion (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. Further, a glass frame (transparent member holding frame) 15 provided with a cover glass (transparent member) 14 covering the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (main body frame) 12.

In addition, lamps, LEDs, etc. are built into the left and right sides of the glass frame 15 for decoration and production, and notification when an abnormality occurs (for example, when a payout abnormality occurs, the lamp, LED, etc. are displayed in an abnormality notification color (for example,). A frame decoration device 18 that emits light for lighting (blinking) in red) and a speaker (upper speaker) 19a that emits sound (for example, sound effect) are provided. Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 19b is also provided below the front frame 12. Further, when an abnormality occurs, the contents of the abnormality are notified by voice from the speakers 19a and 19b. A lamp for notifying the payout abnormality may be provided at a predetermined portion of the glass frame 15.

Further, in the lower part of the front frame 12, an upper plate (storage plate) 21 for supplying a game ball to a hitting ball launching device (not shown) and a game ball paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the game machine 10 are provided. The outflowing upper plate ball outlet 22, the lower plate (receiver) 23 for storing the game ball paid out when the upper plate 21 is full, the operation unit 24 of the hitting ball launching device, and the like are provided. Further, an option setting unit 25 for setting various options by the player is provided on the upper edge portion of the upper plate 21. A plurality of selection button switches 25a are provided around the upper surface of the option setting unit 25, and a determination button switch 25b is provided in the center of the upper surface of the option setting unit 25. The option setting unit 25 functions as an effect setting unit in which the player sets the effect mode. In this case, the selection button switch 25a functions as an effect button switch for selecting the effect mode, and the decision button switch 25b functions as a decision button switch for determining the effect mode. Further, on the lower right side of the lower part of the front frame 12, a key hole 26 for inserting a key for opening or locking the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15 is provided.

When the selection button switch 25a functions as an effect button switch, the gaming machine 10 intervenes the operation of the player based on the operation of the player received from the selection button switch 25a and the decision button switch 25b. Can be done. For example, the effect in which the player's operation is intervened includes the effect in the variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) in the display device (variable display device) 41 (see FIG. 2), and the gaming machine 10 is the display device. It is possible to operate the character displayed on the 41 and stop the identification information in the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device 41.

Further, on the right side of the option setting unit 25, there is a ball lending button 27 that is operated when the player receives a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and an operation for ejecting a prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine. A discharge button 28, a balance display unit (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card, and the like are provided. In the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the player rotates the operation unit 24, the hitting ball launching device transfers the gaming ball supplied from the upper plate 21 to the gaming area 32 on the front surface of the gaming board 30. Fire towards (see Figure 2). Further, by operating the selection button switch 25a and the enter button switch 25b, the player can set, for example, the volume radiated from the speakers 19a and 19b and the brightness of the game board 30. ..

Next, the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view showing an example of the game board of the first embodiment.
On the surface of the game board 30, a substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 is formed. The game area 32 is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and guide rails 31 provided at each of the four corners of the game board 30. In the game area 32, a center case (game effect component) 40 having a display device (variable display device) 41 is arranged substantially in the center. The display device 41 is attached to a recess provided in the center case 40 at a position recessed from the front surface of the center case 40. That is, the center case 40 is formed so as to surround the display area of the display device 41, project forward from the display surface of the display device 41, and make it difficult for the game ball to jump from the surrounding game area 32.

The display device 41 is composed of, for example, a device having a display screen such as an LCD (liquid crystal display) and a CRT (Cathode Ray Tube). In the area (display area) where the image of the display screen can be displayed, information related to the game such as a plurality of identification information (special symbols), characters for directing the special figure variation display game, and background images for enhancing the effect of the effect is displayed. .. On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variablely displayed (variable display), and a decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure variable display game is performed. In addition, an image for producing an effect based on the progress of the game (for example, a jackpot display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.) is displayed on the display screen.

Further, the upper part of the center case 40 is provided with a board effect device 44 that produces a game by operating. The board effect device 44 can operate from the state shown in FIG. 2 toward the center of the display device 41.

On the right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, a normal symbol start gate (normal figure start gate) 34 that gives a start condition of the normal figure variation display game is provided. The game ball that has won the normal drawing start gate 34 (the game ball that passes through the normal drawing start gate 34) is detected by the gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3).

Further, two general winning openings 35 are arranged on the lower left side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, and one general winning opening 35 is arranged on the lower right side of the center case 40 and on the right side of the special variable winning device 38 described later. The winning opening 35 is arranged. The game ball that has won the general winning opening 35 is detected by the winning opening switch 35a (see FIG. 3).

Further, below the center case 40 in the game area 32, a start winning opening 36 forming a first starting winning opening (starting winning area) that gives a start condition for the first special figure variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game). (Starting port 1) is provided. The game ball that has won the start winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3).

Further, below the starting winning opening 36, an out opening 30a for collecting game balls that did not win in the winning opening or the like is provided.
Further, a normal variable winning device 37 (a normal variable winning device 37) which is located below the normal figure start gate 34 and which gives a start condition of the first special figure variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) to the right part of the center case 40. The first start winning opening, starting winning area) is provided. The normal variable winning device 37 (starting port 1) is provided with a movable member 37b that can be opened by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side tilts to the right and can be converted into a state in which a game ball can easily flow in. The 37b is always in a closed closed state (a state disadvantageous to the player) in which the game ball cannot flow in because it is almost vertical. Then, when the result of the normal figure fluctuation display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode, the normal electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) as a driving device rotates so that the upper end side falls to the right and normally fluctuates. The winning device 37 can be changed to an open state (a state advantageous for the player) in which the game ball easily flows into the winning device 37. The game ball that has won the ordinary variable winning device 37 is detected by the start port 1 switch 37a (see FIG. 3). It should be noted that the normal variable winning device 37 may be able to win a prize even in the closed state, and may be harder to win in the closed state than in the open state. The ordinary variable winning device 37 corresponds to an ordinary electric accessory (general electric).

A flow path 91 through which the game ball can flow down is formed on the right side of the normal variable winning device 37, and the game ball that has not won the normal variable winning device 37 flows downward through the flow down path 91. A start winning opening 92 is provided in the lower part of the flow path 91, and a guide portion 93 is provided in the lower part of the flow path 91. The guide portion 93 has an inclined surface whose upper surface 94 descends to the left, and the upper surface 94 catches a game ball flowing downward without winning a prize in the starting winning opening 92, and the left side where the special variable winning device 38 described later exists. It is designed to guide you toward you.

The start winning opening 92 is a second starting winning opening (starting winning area) that gives a start condition for the second special figure variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game), and the starting winning opening 92 (starting opening 2) is used. The winning game ball is detected by the start port 2 switch 92a (see FIG. 3).

Further, in the lower right of the center case 40 in the game area 32, a special variable winning device (large winning opening) 38 that can be converted into a state in which the game ball is not accepted and a state in which the game ball is easily accepted depending on the result of the special figure variation display game is arranged. It is set up. The special variable winning device 38 has an opening / closing member (opening / closing door) 38c, and the opening / closing member 38c is in a closed state (disadvantageous to the player) depending on the result of the special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game. The opening / closing member 38c retracts from the closed state) and converts the game ball flowing down the game area 32 into an open state (a state advantageous for the player) that can be accepted. That is, the special variable winning device 38 includes a large winning opening (large winning opening) opened and closed by an opening / closing member 38c driven by a large winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 3) as a driving device. And during the big hit game state (first special game state) due to the result of the special figure 2 variable display game, or during the small hit game state (second special game state) due to the result of the special figure 2 variable display game, the big prize opening is opened. By converting from the closed state to the open state, the inflow of the game ball into the large winning opening is facilitated, and a predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player. Inside the large winning opening (winning area), a large winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 3) is provided as a detection means for detecting the game ball that has entered the large winning opening. ..

The special variable winning device 38 may be provided with a plurality (for example, two) of large winning opening switches 38a. Further, the special variable winning device 38 is not limited to one, and two may be provided, and when there are a plurality of large winning openings, the large winning opening switch 38a is about one or two, respectively. , X pieces (see FIG. 3) may be provided as a whole.

Further, a warp opening (warp entrance) 39a is provided on the left side of the center case 40. The game ball that has flowed into the warp flow path from the warp port 39a rolls on the stage in the center case 40, and a part of the game ball is guided to the warp outlet 39b. The warp outlet 39b is located directly above the starting winning opening 36, and the game ball guided to the warp exit 39b can easily win the starting winning opening 36.

In the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, of the gaming areas 32 in which the gaming ball flows down, the left area of the center case 40 is the left gaming area, and the right area of the center case 40 is the right gaming area. It is said that. Then, the player adjusts the firing force and launches the game ball into the left game area (so-called left-handed) to start the starting winning opening 36 and the general winning opening 35 (general winning opening on the right side of the special variable winning device 38). You can aim to win a prize (excluding 35), and by launching a game ball to the right game area (so-called right-handed), you can win a prize in the normal figure start gate 34, the normal variable winning device 37, the special variable winning device 38, etc. You can aim at.

Further, on the outside of the game area 32 (here, the lower right of the game board 30), the first special figure fluctuation display game, the second special figure fluctuation display game, and the normal figure start gate 34, which form the special figure fluctuation display game, are connected. A batch display device 50 for displaying a normal map variation display game triggered by winning a prize and displaying various information is provided.

The batch display device 50 includes a round display unit 51 composed of LEDs and the like, a special figure 1 hold display unit 52, a special figure 1 symbol display unit 53, a special figure 2 symbol display unit 54, and a normal symbol display unit. It includes 55, a normal drawing hold display unit 56, and a status display unit 57 (see FIG. 5). Details of the batch display device 50 will be described later.

Next, the control system of the gaming machine will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an example of the control system of the gaming machine of the first embodiment.
The game machine 10 includes a game control device 100, and the game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that collectively controls a game, and is a game microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a game microcomputer) 111. A CPU (Central Processing Unit) unit 110 having a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 110, an input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port, a driver, etc., and a CPU unit 110, an input unit 120, and an output unit 130 are connected to each other. It consists of a data bus 140 and the like.

The CPU unit 110 includes a gaming microcomputer 111 called an amusement chip (IC (Integrated Circuit)) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and serves as a reference for an operating clock, a timer interrupt, and a random number generation circuit of the gaming microcomputer 111. It has an oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 and the like that generate a clock. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as solenoids and motors driven by the game control device 100 are supplied with a predetermined level of direct current voltage such as DC (Direct Current) 32V, DC12V, DC5V generated by the power supply device 400. To be operational.

The power supply device 400 includes an AC (Alternating Current) -DC converter that generates a DC voltage of DC32V from a 24V AC power supply, a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC12V and DC5V from a voltage of DC32V, and the like. A normal power supply unit 410 having a power supply unit 410, a backup power supply unit 420 that supplies a power supply voltage to the RAM (Random Access Memory) inside the game microcomputer 111 in the event of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and a power failure in the game control device 100. The control signal generation unit 430 and the like for generating and outputting control signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal for notifying the occurrence and recovery of the above are provided.

In the first embodiment, the power supply unit 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate board or with the game control device 100, that is, , It may be configured to be provided on the main board. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal are mounted on a board different from the power supply device 400 or the main board as in the first embodiment. By providing the generation unit 430, it is possible to remove the target from replacement and reduce the cost.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured by one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 (particularly the built-in RAM) of the game control device 100, and the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or even after the power is cut off. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure when it drops to 17V or less, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the signal after a predetermined time. Is output. Also, when the power is turned on or when the power is restored, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that point.

Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. When the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, the information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is forcibly initialized. Processing is done. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. A reset signal is a type of forced interrupt signal that resets the entire control system.

Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a setting value change switch 126 and a setting key switch 127. The set value change switch 126 is, for example, a push switch and detects a pressing operation. The setting key switch 127 inserts a setting key to enable switching between an ON state and an OFF state. The game control device 100 can change the settings related to the game performance, and the settings stored in the RAM are retained even during a power failure or power failure. For example, the game control device 100 makes it possible to change the hit probabilities of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game according to the setting of 6 steps.

The game control device 100 transitions to a setting change mode in which the setting of the game machine 10 can be changed by turning on the power while the setting key switch 127 is ON and the RAM initialization switch 112 is ON. For example, the game control device 100 makes it possible to cyclically change the settings 1 to 6 by detecting the pressing operation of the setting value change switch 126 while displaying the setting contents on the probability setting value display device 136 in the setting change mode. The probability set value display device 136 is a display device capable of displaying the set value, and is, for example, a one-digit 7-segment LED mounted on a substrate.

Further, the game control device 100 shifts the control state to the setting confirmation mode in which the setting confirmation of the game machine 10 can be performed by turning on the power while the setting key switch 127 is ON and the RAM initialization switch 112 is OFF. .. For example, the game control device 100 displays the setting contents on the probability setting value display device 136 in the setting confirmation mode.

The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A, a read-only ROM (Read Only Memory) 111B, and a RAM 111C that can be read and written at any time.

The ROM 111B non-volatilely stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, determination values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control, and the RAM 111C is a work area of the CPU 111A or a storage area of various signals and random numbers during game control. It is used as. As the ROM 111B or the RAM 111C, an electrically rewritable non-volatile memory such as an EEPROM (Electrically Erasable Programmable ROM) may be used.

Further, the ROM 111B stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the effect content, the presence / absence of the occurrence of the reach state, and the like. The variation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to refer to the variation pattern random number 1, the variation pattern random number 2, and the variation pattern random number 3 stored as the start memory to determine the variation pattern. Further, the fluctuation pattern table includes a missed fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is missed, a jackpot fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is a jackpot, and the like. Further, these pattern tables include a table for determining the latter half fluctuation pattern, which is a fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.), and fluctuation before reaching the reach state. A table for determining the first half fluctuation pattern, which is a pattern (first half fluctuation group table, first half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.) is included.

Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, and the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state becomes an advantageous gaming state (special gaming state) for the player when the special result mode is adopted, a part of the plurality of display results has not yet been derived and displayed. Derived A display state in which the displayed display result satisfies the condition of the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is out of the display condition that is the special result mode even when the variable display control of the display device progresses and the display result reaches the stage before the derivation display. Refers to a display mode that does not exist. Further, for example, a state in which variation display is performed by a plurality of variation display areas (so-called full rotation reach) while maintaining a state in which the special result modes are aligned is also included in the reach state. Further, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. It refers to a display state when at least a part of the display results of a plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition of the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variation display game changes a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas on the display device. After the display, when the variation display is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle to display the result mode, the left and right variation display areas satisfy the conditions for the special result mode (for example,). The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, when the fluctuation display of all the fluctuation display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition of the special result mode in any two of the left, middle, and right fluctuation display areas is satisfied (for example, the same). The state that has become the identification information, except for the special result mode) may be set as the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variablely displayed from this reach state.

The reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and as reach effects in which the possibility of deriving a special result mode is different (expected value is different), normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), and so on. Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and premier reach are set. The expected value increases in the order of "no reach" <"normal reach" <"special 1 reach" <"special 2 reach" <"special 3 reach" <"premier reach". Further, this reach state is included in the variation display mode at least when the special result mode is derived (when it becomes a big hit) in the special figure variation display game. That is, it may be included in the variation display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variation display game (when it is out of order). Therefore, the state in which the reach state occurs is more likely to be a big hit than the case in which the reach state does not occur.

The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B to generate a control signal (command) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, or generate and output a drive signal for a solenoid or a display device to output the game machine. 10 Control the entire system. Further, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a jackpot random number for determining a hit in a special figure variation display game, a jackpot symbol random number for determining a jackpot symbol, and a variation pattern in a special figure variation display game (various types). Random number generation circuit for generating fluctuation pattern random numbers for determining (including the execution time of the fluctuation display game in the fluctuation display without reach and reach), hit random numbers for determining the hit of the clock fluctuation display game, etc. A clock generator that generates a timer interrupt signal with a predetermined period (for example, 4 ms (ms)) for the CPU 111A and a clock that gives an update timing of the random number generation circuit based on the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113. I have.

Further, the CPU 111A acquires any one of the fluctuation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B in the process related to the special figure fluctuation display game. Specifically, the CPU 111A determines the game result (hit (big hit or small hit) or miss) of the special figure variation display game and the probability state (normal probability state or high probability) of the special figure variation display game as the current game state. State), the operating state (time saving operating state) of the normal variable winning device 37 as the current game state, the number of start memories, etc., and one of the variable pattern tables is selected from a plurality of variable pattern tables. To get. Here, the CPU 111A serves as a variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one of the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B when executing the special figure variation display game.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, ROM, RAM, input interface, output interface, and the like, and is a payout motor of a payout unit provided in the game machine 10 in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100. It controls to drive the prize ball and pay out the prize ball. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball lending request signal from the card unit of the ball lending machine attached to the game machine 10 to control the payout of the ball. ..

The input unit 120 of the game microcomputer 111 includes a start port 1 switch 36a in the start winning port 36, a start port 1 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37, a start port 2 switch 92a in the start winning port 92, and a general drawing. It is connected to the gate switch 34a in the starting gate 34, the winning opening switch 35a, and the large winning opening switch 38a of the special variable winning device 38, and the high level supplied from these switches is 11V and the low level is 7V. An interface chip (proximity I / F) 121 is provided, in which a signal is input and converted into a 0V-5V positive logic signal. The detection signal of the panel radio wave sensor 62 that detects the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine 10 is also input to the proximity I / F 121. Further, in the proximity I / F121, since the input range is set to 7V-11V, the lead wire of the sensor or the proximity switch is illegally shorted, the sensor or the switch is disconnected from the connector, or the lead wire is cut. It is configured to be able to detect an abnormal state such as floating and output an abnormality detection signal.

Explaining the winning opening switch 35a, although the winning opening switch 35a is shown by one block in FIG. 3, a plurality of (N) winning opening switches 35a (three in the present embodiment) are actually used. Is provided on the game board 30, and each signal is input to the proximity I / F 121 with different signal lines. Further, although the large winning opening switch 38a is shown by one block in FIG. 3, a plurality of (X) large winning opening switches 38a (three in the present embodiment) are actually provided on the game board 30. Has been done. Then, these plurality of large winning opening switches 38a are connected by different signal lines, or are wired or on a relay board (not shown) existing between the switch and the game control device 100 (main board), for example. It is connected to the game control device 100 by a method called wired OR). The panel radio wave sensor 62 and the magnetic sensor 61 described later may also be connected by a plurality of different signal lines, or may be similarly connected to the game control device 100 by a method called wired or.

The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a, 37a, the start port 2 switch 92a, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, and the large winning port switch 38a are the second input port 123. Is entered in. The signal outputs (outputs from the proximity I / F 121) of the start port 1 switches 36a and 37a, which are the start port switches in FIG. 1, are shown by one signal line in FIG. 3, but are actually shown. There are two.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signal of the panel radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the third input port 124. Further, the third input port 124 has a detection signal of a magnetic sensor 61 for fraud detection provided on the front frame 12 or the like of the game machine 10, and a glass frame open detection switch provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the game machine 10. 63 detection signal, detection signal of main body frame open detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 of the game machine 10, detection signal of setting value change switch 126, detection signal of setting key switch 127, RAM initial The detection signal of the conversion switch 112 is input.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the output to the second input port 123 is also supplied from the game control device 100 to a test firing test device (not shown) via the relay board 70. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the start port 1 switches 36a and 37a and the start port 2 switch 92a are configured to be input to the game microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123. There is.

As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12V in addition to the voltage such as 5V required for normal IC operation from the power supply device 400. It has become.

For the data held by the second input port 123, the gaming microcomputer 111 asserts the enable signal CE (Chip Enable) (not shown) by decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123 (to the effective level). It can be read by changing). The same applies to the third input port 124 and the first input port 122 described later.

Further, the input unit 120 receives a frame radio wave illegal signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output based on the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12 detecting the radio wave) and a payout busy signal (payout control device). 200 indicates whether or not the command can be accepted), payout abnormality status signal (status signal indicating payout abnormality), shoot ball out switch signal (signal indicating shortage of game balls before payout), overflow switch signal (A signal output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 (it is full)), and a touch switch signal (for input of a touch switch provided on the operation unit 24). A first input port 122 is provided which takes in the original signal) and the out-ball detection switch signal (the signal output when the out-ball is detected) and supplies the signal to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140.

The out-ball detection switch signal is a signal output from the out-sensor each time the out-sensor (not shown) detects one out-ball of the gaming machine 10. For example, the out ball detection switch signal is provided in the discharge flow path (not shown) between the discharge port (not shown) for discharging the game ball (out ball) from the game machine 10 and the out port 30a. The out-ball detection switch signal is used to calculate the game performance (for example, base) per predetermined operation (for example, 60,000 out-balls), and the calculated game performance is displayed on the state display device 135. The out-ball detection switch signal may be input to the effect control device 300. In that case, the out-ball detection switch signal may be used for determining the operating state, which is a trigger for switching to the game effect or the customer waiting screen display. For example, the status display device 135 is a 4-digit 7-segment LED, and can display the game performance in decimal or hexadecimal.

Further, the game machine 10 may be provided with a vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration so that the detection signal of the vibration sensor switch is input to the first input port 122 or the third input port 124.

Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the game microcomputer 111 and the like, and the Schmidt buffer 125 is provided with these inputs. It has a function of removing noise from a signal. The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because there is a limit to the number of terminals provided on the gaming microcomputer 111 that receive signals from the outside.

On the other hand, the reset signal RESET whose noise has been removed by the Schmidt buffer 125 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and is supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, the reset signal RESET is output directly to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130, so that the test firing test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 is turned off in order to output to the test firing test device. It is configured to do. Further, the reset signal RESET may be configured to be output to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70. The reset signal RESET is not supplied to the first to third input ports 122, 123, 124 of the input unit 120. The data set in each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 just before the reset signal RESET is input needs to be reset in order to prevent the system from malfunctioning, but the input unit 120 is set just before the reset signal RESET is input. This is because the data read by the game microcomputer 111 from each port is discarded by resetting the game microcomputer 111.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 132 arranged on a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. The serial communication from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 is a one-way communication in which a signal cannot be input from the effect control device 300 side to the game control device 100.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and transmits data for notifying the special symbol information of the variable display game to the test firing test device of the accreditation body (not shown), a signal indicating the probability state of the jackpot, and the like via the relay board 70. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on the game control device (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (mass production product) installed in a game store. The detection signal of a switch such as a start port switch that does not need to be processed, which is output from the proximity I / F 121, is supplied to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

On the other hand, a detection signal that cannot be supplied to the test firing test device as it is, such as the magnetic sensor 61 and the panel radio wave sensor 62, is once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information. It is supplied from the data bus 140 to the test firing test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70 as an error signal indicating that the state cannot be controlled. The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test firing test apparatus, a connector that relays and transmits the signal line of the switch detection signal that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. ing. A chip enable signal CE (not shown) output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and the signal of the port selectively controlled by the chip enable signal CE is supplied to the test firing test apparatus. It has become like.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 to open / close the opening / closing member 38c of the special variable winning device 38 (large winning opening), the opening / closing data of the large winning opening solenoid 38b, and the movable member 37b of the normal variable winning device 37. The first output port 134a for outputting the opening / closing data of the normal electric solenoid 37c for opening / closing and the display data of the status display device 135 is provided. Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a second output port 134b for outputting the display data of the probability set value display device 136. Further, the output unit 130 has a third output port 134c for outputting on / off data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content to be displayed on the batch display device 50, and the batch display device 50. A fourth output port 134d for outputting on / off data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected is provided.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a fifth output port 134e for outputting information related to the gaming machine 10 such as jackpot information to the external information terminal board 71. The external information terminal board 71 is provided with a photo relay, which can be connected to, for example, an external device (information collection terminal, game hall internal management device (hall computer), etc.) installed in a game store, and information about the game machine 10. Can be supplied to an external device via a photo relay. A part of the information supplied to the external device is output from the fourth output port 134d. Further, a launch permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 134e to the payout control device 200 via the Schmidt buffer 132.

Further, the output unit 130 receives the opening / closing data signals of the large winning opening solenoid 38b and the general electric solenoid 37c output from the first output port 134a, generates a solenoid drive signal, and outputs the first driver (drive circuit) 138a. , The current of the batch display device 50 output from the second driver 138b and the fourth output port 134d that output the on / off drive signal of the segment line on the current supply side of the batch display device 50 output from the third output port 134c. External information signals supplied from the third driver 138c, the fifth output port 134e, and the fourth output port 134d that output the on / off drive signal of the digit line on the lead-in side to an external device such as a management device to the external information terminal board 71. A fourth driver 138d to output and a fifth driver 138e to generate and output a drive signal of the state display device 135 by receiving the display data signal of the state display device 135 output from the first output port 134a are provided.

DC32V is supplied from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage to the first driver 138a so that a solenoid operating at 32V can be driven. Further, DC12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment line of the batch display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit wire is for pulling out the digit wire corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

A dynamic drive system in which a second driver 138b that outputs 12V causes a current to flow into the anode terminal of the LED via the segment wire, and a third driver 138c that outputs a ground potential draws a current from the cathode terminal via the segment wire. The power supply voltage flows through the LEDs sequentially selected in step 2 and the LEDs are turned on. The fourth driver 138d, which outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71, supplies the external information signal with a level of 12V, so that DC12V is supplied. The buffer 133, the first output port 134a, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the output unit 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board. Further, the status display device 135, or the fifth driver 138e and the status display device 135 may be provided on the output unit 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the external board (not shown) side instead of the main board. ..

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to an external inspection device 490. The photocoupler 139 is configured so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can communicate with the inspection device 490 by serial communication. Since such data transmission / reception is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in the case of a normal general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the first to third input ports 122, 123, 124 are used. Not provided.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an example of the configuration of the effect control device of the first embodiment.
The effect control device 300 is used to display images on the display device 41 according to commands and data from the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 composed of an amusement chip (IC) and the main control microcomputer 311 like the game microcomputer 111. It is equipped with a VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor that performs image processing, and a sound source LSI 314 that controls sound output in order to reproduce various melody and sound effects from the speakers 19a and 19b.

The main control microcomputer 311 has a PROM 321 composed of a PROM (programmable read-only memory) that stores programs executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 322 that provides a work area, and can hold stored contents even if power is not supplied in the event of a power failure. A Fe RAM (Ferroelectric RAM) 323 and an RTC (real-time clock) 338 that serves as a timing means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day, day, time, etc.) are connected. A RAM 311a that provides a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command (effect command) from the game microcomputer 111, determines the effect content, instructs the VDP 312 about the content of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 of the reproduced sound, and decorates the lamp. Lights up, controls the drive of motors and solenoids, manages the production time, and so on.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a that provides a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging / reducing an image. Further, the VDP 312 is connected to an image ROM 325 in which character images and video data are stored, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM 326 used for developing and processing image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. Has been done.

Although not particularly limited, data is transmitted and received between the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 in a parallel manner. By sending and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be sent in a shorter time than in the case of serial.

From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the video of the display device 41 with the lighting of the decorative lamps provided on the glass frame 15 and the game board 30, and a synchronization signal for giving data transmission timing. STS is input. It should be noted that the VDP 312 informs the main control microcomputer 311 that it is in a state of waiting for reception of interrupt signals INT0 to n and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing in VRAM. The wait signal WAIT and the like for the purpose are also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by an LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC, and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the video generated by the VDP 312 is transmitted to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

An audio ROM 327 in which audio data is stored is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the sound source LSI 314 are connected via the address / data bus 340. Further, an interrupt signal INT is input from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19b provided on the front frame 12, and is generated by the sound source LSI 314. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 that receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100. The effect control command signal (effect command) is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 via this command I / F331, such as a decoration special figure hold number command, a decoration special figure command, a variation command, and a stop information command. ). Since the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC 5 V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3 V, the command I / F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function. There is.

Further, the effect control device 300 includes a panel decoration LED control circuit 332 and a glass frame 15 that drive and control a panel decoration device 46 having an LED (light emitting diode) or the like provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). A frame decoration LED control circuit 333 that drives and controls a frame decoration device (for example, a frame decoration device 18 or the like) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided in the above, and a board provided in the game board 30 (including the center case 40). A panel effect movable body control circuit 334 is provided to drive and control the effect device 44 (for example, a movable accessory that enhances the effect of the effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41). These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via the address / data bus 340. Even if the glass frame 15 is provided with a frame effect device provided with a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating a device for effect) and is provided with a frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling the frame effect device. good.

Further, the effect control device 300 includes a selection button switch 25a and a decision button switch 25b of the option setting unit 25 provided on the glass frame 15, and an effect switch that detects the initial position of the motor in the board effect device 44. A function of detecting the on / off state of 47 (effect motor switch) and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 and a function of detecting the state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the effect control device 300 for main control. A switch input circuit 336 having a function of inputting a detection signal to the microcomputer 311 is provided.

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 drives a motor or a solenoid in order to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control device 300 having the above configuration and the electronic components controlled by the effect control device 300. DC32V, display device 41 consisting of liquid crystal panel, DC12V for driving motors and LEDs, DC5V for driving command I / F331, and DC15V for driving motors, LEDs, and speakers. It is configured to do. Further, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3V or 1.2V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, the DC-DC for generating DC3.3V or DC1.2V based on DC5V is used. A DC converter is provided in the effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device in the reset state. Further, it is supplied to the VDP 312 (VDPReSET signal), the sound source LSI314, the amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal), and the control circuits 332-334 (IORESET signal) that drive and control lamps, motors, etc., in the form of being output from the main control microcomputer 311. And put them in the reset state. Further, a cooling FAN 45 for cooling various parts of the gaming machine 10 is connected to the effect control device 300, and the cooling FAN 45 is driven when the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on. Further, the circuit board constituting the effect control device 300 corresponds to a sub control board (also referred to as a sub board).

Next, the game control performed in these control circuits will be described.
In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, a random value for hit determination in the normal figure is extracted based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided in the normal figure start gate 34, and the ROM 111B Compared with the judgment value stored in, the process of judging the hit / miss of the normal figure fluctuation display game is performed. Then, after the identification symbol (identification information) is variablely displayed for a predetermined time on the normal symbol symbol display unit 55 of the batch display device 50, a process of displaying a normal symbol variation display game that is stopped and displayed is performed. When the result of this normal figure variation display game is a hit, a special result mode corresponding to each of the first hit stop symbol to the third hit stop symbol is displayed on the normal symbol display unit 55, and the normal electric solenoid 37c is displayed. Is operated to control the movable member 37b of the normal variable winning device 37 to be opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds or 1.7 seconds) as described above. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). If the result of the normal figure variation display game is out of sync, the normal figure symbol display unit 55 is controlled to display the result mode of the out of alignment.

Further, the start winning prize (starting memory) is stored based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting opening 1 switch 36a provided in the starting winning opening 36 and the starting opening 1 switch 37a provided in the normal variable winning device 37. , Based on this start memory, a process of extracting a random value for jackpot determination of the first special figure variation display game, comparing it with a determination value stored in ROM 111B, and determining a hit / miss of the first special figure variation display game. To do. In addition, the start memory is memorized based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the start port 2 switch 92a provided in the start winning opening 92, and based on this start memory, the jackpot determination disturbance of the second special figure variation display game The numerical value is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B, and the process of determining the hit / miss of the second special figure variation display game is performed.

Then, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 outputs a control signal (effect control command, effect command) including the determination results of the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game to the effect control device 300. do. Then, after displaying the identification symbol (identification information) on the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 and the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 of the batch display device 50 for a predetermined time, a process of displaying a special figure variation display game that is stopped and displayed. To do. That is, the game control device 100 controls the progress of the variable display game based on the winning of the starting winning area (starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37, starting winning opening 92) of the game ball flowing down the game area 32. It serves as a game control means.

Further, the effect control device 300 performs a process of displaying the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game on the display device 41 based on the control signal from the game control device 100. Further, the effect control device 300 performs processing such as setting the effect state, outputting sounds from the speakers 19a and 19b, and controlling the light emission of various LEDs based on the control signal from the game control device 100. That is, the effect control device 300 serves as an effect control means for controlling the effect related to the game (variable display game, etc.).

Then, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit or a small hit, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 displays a special result mode or a small hit result mode on the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 or the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54. Is displayed, and a process for generating a special game state or a small hit game state (that is, a process for executing a special game or a small hit game) is performed. In the process of generating a special gaming state due to the result of the first special figure variation display game or the second special figure variation display game being a big hit, the CPU 111A uses, for example, the special variable winning device 38 by the large winning opening solenoid 38b. The opening / closing member 38c of the game is opened, and control is performed so that the game ball can flow into the winning opening. In this special gaming state, the CPU 111A is subject to either a condition that a predetermined number (for example, 9) of game balls wins in the large winning opening, or a predetermined opening time elapses from the opening of the large winning opening. One round is to open the big winning opening until it is achieved, and control (cycle game) is performed to continue (repeat) this a predetermined number of rounds. In addition, a small hit game state is generated due to the result of the first special figure variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) or the second special figure variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) being a small hit. In the process, the CPU 111A controls, for example, the opening / closing member 38c of the special variable winning device 38 by the large winning opening solenoid 38b to allow the game ball to flow into the large winning opening.

The opening / closing operation pattern (opening / closing operation mode) of the large winning opening performed in these small hit game states is, for example, an operation of maintaining the opening / closing member in the open state for 200 msec four times at 1500 msec intervals. As described above, the game control device 100 serves as a large winning opening opening / closing control means for controlling the opening / closing of the large winning opening when the stop result mode becomes the special result mode. Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is out of order, the CPU 111A controls the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 and the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 of the batch display device 50 to display the result mode of the deviation.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a game state after the end of the special game state based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In this high probability state, the probability of a hit result in the special figure variation display game is higher than that in the normal probability state. Further, regardless of the high probability state based on the result mode of either the first special figure variation display game or the second special figure variation display game, the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure change display game and the second special figure. Both variable display games are in a high probability state.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a time saving state (specific game state, high probability state in the normal figure) as a game state after the end of the special game state, based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In this time-saving state, the probability of hitting the result of the normal map fluctuation display game (normal figure probability) is set to a high probability (normal figure high probability state) higher than 0, which is the normal probability (normal figure low probability state). Is possible. As a result, the opening time of the ordinary variable winning device 37 per unit time is controlled to be longer than that in the case where the ordinary variable winning device 37 is in the low probability state of the normal figure. Here, in the normal variable winning device 37 in the present embodiment, the normal figure probability is set to "0" so as not to open the movable member 37b in the normal gaming state.

Further, in the time saving state, the execution time of the normal map fluctuation display game (normal map fluctuation time) is, for example, 500 msec, and the normal map stop time for displaying the result of the normal map fluctuation display game is, for example, 600 msec. When the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened as a result of the normal fluctuation display game, the opening time (normal power opening time) and the number of times of opening (for example, 500 ms x 1 time) of the first hit stop symbol, The opening time (for example, 1700 ms x 2 times) of the second stop symbol and the number of times of opening (for example, 1700 ms x 2), and the opening time (for example, 1700 ms x 2) of the third stop symbol. It is possible to set it to be 3 times).

It should be noted that the execution time, the normal figure stop time, the normal power release number, and the normal power release time of the normal figure fluctuation display game are appropriately set so as to control the normal fluctuation display game and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 to be in a time-saving operation state. For example, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the execution time (normal figure fluctuation time) of the above-mentioned normal figure fluctuation display game to be the second variable display time shorter than the first variable display time. (For example, 10000 msec is 1000 msec). Further, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the normal figure stop time for displaying the result of the normal figure variation display game to be the second stop time shorter than the first stop time (for example, 1604 msec). 704msec). Further, in the time saving state, when the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened as a result of the normal fluctuation display game, the opening time (normal power opening time) is set to the normal state (normal figure low probability state). It is possible to control the second opening time to be longer than the first opening time (for example, 100 msec is 1352 msec). Further, in the time saving state, the number of times the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened (the number of times the normal electric power is opened) is larger than the number of times the first opening (for example, 2 times) is obtained with respect to the result of one hit of the normal fluctuation display game. It is possible to set the number of times (for example, 4 times) to the second opening number of times. Further, in the time saving state, the probability of hitting the result of the normal map fluctuation display game (normal figure probability) is higher than the normal probability (normal figure low probability state, for example, 1/251) in the normal operating state. It can be a probability (a high probability state in the normal figure, for example, 250/251).

In the time saving state, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened by changing any one or more of the normal fluctuation time, the normal stop time, the number of times the normal power is opened, the normal power opening time, and the normal probability. Try to extend the conversion time longer than usual. It is also possible to set a plurality of types of time saving states in which different things are changed. Further, when a hit occurs, either the first open mode or the second open mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first open mode and the second open mode may be different. Further, the high probability state and the time saving state can be generated independently, both can be generated at the same time, or only one can be generated. In addition, the time saving state can also be referred to as a general electric support state (during general electric support or electric support).

Next, the configuration of the batch display device will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing an example of the batch display device of the first embodiment. The batch display device 50 includes a 7-segment LED_d1 and a 7-segment LED_d2, and 16 LEDs from LED_d3 to LED_d18. The batch display device 50 displays various states according to the lighting modes of the 7-segment LED_d1, the 7-segment LED_d2, and the LEDs_d3 to LED_d18.

The batch display device 50 allocates various status display functions from the 7-segment LED_d1 and the 7-segment LED_d2, and from the LED_d3 to the LED_d18, so that the round display unit 51, the special figure 1 hold display unit 52, and the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 The special figure 2 symbol display unit 54, the normal symbol symbol display unit 55, the normal figure hold display unit 56, the state display unit 57, and the special figure 2 hold display unit 58 are provided. The round display unit 51 displays the number of rounds in the special figure game according to the lighting mode of the four LEDs from LED_d3 to LED_d6. The special figure 1 hold display unit 52 displays the number of holds in the special figure 1 game according to the lighting mode of the two LEDs, LED_d11 and LED_d12. The special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 displays the symbol in the special figure 1 game according to the lighting mode of eight LEDs (seven segment LEDs and one dot LED) of the seven-segment LED_d1. The special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 displays the symbol in the special figure 2 game according to the lighting mode of eight LEDs (seven segment LEDs and one dot LED) of the seven-segment LED_d2. The normal symbol display unit 55 displays a symbol in the normal symbol game according to the lighting mode of the three LEDs of LED_d8, LED_d10, and LED_d18. The normal figure hold display unit 56 displays the number of hold in the normal figure game according to the lighting mode of the two LEDs, LED_d15 and LED_d16. The state display unit 57 displays the game state in the special figure game according to the lighting modes of the three LEDs, LED_d7, LED_d9, and LED_d17. The special figure 2 hold display unit 58 displays the number of holds in the special figure 2 game according to the lighting mode of the two LEDs, LED_d13 and LED_d14.

Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control process by the game microcomputer 111 mainly includes the main process shown in FIGS. 6 to 8 and the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 9 performed in a predetermined time period (for example, 4 ms).

[Main processing]
First, the main process will be described. FIG. 6 is a diagram (No. 1) showing a flowchart of the main process of the first embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram (No. 2) showing a flowchart of the main process of the first embodiment. FIG. 8 is a diagram (No. 3) showing a flowchart of the main process of the first embodiment. The main process is a process executed by the game control unit (CPU111A).

The main process is started when the power is turned on. In this main process, as shown in FIGS. 6 to 8, first, the process of disabling interrupts (step S1) is performed, and then the start address of the area for saving the value of the register or the like when an interrupt occurs is used. The stack pointer setting process (step S2) for setting a certain stack pointer is performed. Next, register bank 0 is specified (step S3), and the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S4). In the case of the first embodiment, the address range of the RAM 111C is 0000h to 01FFh, and the upper rank is 00h or 01h. In step S4, 00h, which is on the head side of the address range of the RAM 111C, is set.

Next, the launch stop signal is output and the launch permission signal is set to the prohibited state (step S5). The launch permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a launch stop signal, and the launch of the game ball is prohibited.

After that, the state of the input port 3 (third input port 124) is read (step S6), and a process of setting the power-on delay timer is performed (step S7). In this process, by setting a predetermined initial value, a slave control means (for example, a payout control device 200 or an effect control device 300) that performs various controls according to an instruction from the game control device 100 that serves as the main control means. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting for the program to start normally is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 temporarily starts up first and sends a command to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) starts up, and the slave control device Can avoid missing commands. That is, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 delays the start of the main control means (game control device 100) and waits for the start of the slave control devices (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.). It serves as a waiting means for setting the waiting time.

Further, the power-on delay timer is timed by using a storage area (RAM area or register, etc. that is not subject to the validity judgment) that is not subject to the validity judgment (checksum calculation) of the data held in the RAM area. As a result, when calculating check data such as a checksum of a RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area for calculation, so that it is possible to prevent the control at the time of power-on from becoming complicated.

An initialization switch signal is input to the third input port 124, and the RAM initialization switch 112 can be operated by reading the state of the third input port 124 before the start of the standby time. It can be detected reliably. That is, if the state of the RAM initialization switch 112 is read after the standby time has elapsed, the RAM initialization switch 112 can be operated after the standby time has elapsed, or the RAM initialization switch can be operated from the power-on to the standby time. It is necessary to keep operating 112. However, by reading the state before the start of the standby time, it can be detected by performing the operation immediately after the power is turned on without performing such annoying operations, and the initialization operation performed when the power is turned on. Can be prevented from being unacceptable.

Further, the detection signal of the setting value change switch 126 and the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 are input to the third input port 124, and the state of the third input port 124 is changed before the start of the standby time. By reading, the operation of the setting value change switch 126 and the setting key switch 127 can be reliably detected. That is, if the states of the setting value change switch 126 and the setting key switch 127 are read after the standby time has elapsed, the setting value change switch 126 and the setting key switch 127 are operated or the power is turned on after the standby time has elapsed. It is necessary to continue to operate the setting value change switch 126 and the setting key switch 127 from the time until the elapse of the standby time. However, by reading the state before the start of the standby time, it can be detected by performing the operation immediately after turning on the power without performing such annoying operation, and the setting change operation performed at the time of turning on the power or It is possible to prevent the situation where the setting confirmation operation is not accepted.

Next, after performing the process of setting the power-on delay timer (for example, about 3 seconds) (step S7), the process of timing the standby time and monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (steps S8 to S12). To do. First, the number of times (for example, twice) to read and check the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus is set (step S8), and whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on or not is set. A determination is made (step S9).

When the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9; Y), it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is continuously on for the number of checks set in step S8 (step S10). Then, when the power failure monitoring signal has not been turned on for the number of checks (step S10; N), the process returns to the determination of whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9). Further, when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously turned on for the number of checks (step S10; Y), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the power of the gaming machine 10 is waited to be cut off. .. In this way, by determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of a power failure due to noise or the like, and appropriately deal with problems when the power is turned on. be able to.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time. As a result, it is possible to deal with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100, which is the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a problem at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM 111C is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the time of the previous power cutoff are retained. Therefore, when a power failure occurs here, backup processing is performed. No need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM 111C, and the burden of control can be reduced.

On the other hand, when the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S9; N), that is, when a power failure has not occurred, the power-on delay timer is updated to "-1" (step S11), and the timer value is "0". (Step S12). If the value of the timer is not 0 (step S12; N), that is, if the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of times the power failure monitoring signal is checked (step S8). Further, when the value of the timer is "0" (step S12; Y), that is, when the standby time ends, access permission of RWM (Read Write Memory) such as RAM111C or EEPROM that can be read and written is granted (step). S13), off-data is output to all output ports (set to a state where there is no output) (step S14).

Next, a serial port (a port previously mounted on the gaming microcomputer 111, which is used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in the first embodiment) is set (step S15). It is determined whether or not the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is the normal power failure inspection area check data 1 (for example, 5Ah) (step S16).

Then, if the value of the power failure inspection area 1 is normal (step S16; Y), it is determined whether or not the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is the normal power failure inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h). (Step S17) If the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step S17; Y), the checksum calculation process (step S18) for calculating the checksum of the predetermined area in the RWM is performed.

In the checksum calculation process, the sum of the data of the game control work area and the data of the status display work area may be calculated as a checksum, or the data of the game control work area and the status display work may be calculated. The checksum may be calculated separately from the data of the area, or the checksum may be calculated only from the data of the game control work area. The game control work area is a work area used for game control in the storage area in the RWM. The status display work area is a work area used for status display in the storage area in the RWM.

Next, it is determined whether or not the checksum calculated in step S18 and the checksum when the power is turned off match (step S19), and if the checksums match (step S19; Y), the beginning of RAM clearing. The RAM clear start address 2 is set as the address (step S20). The RAM clear start address 2 is an address that excludes the probability set value from the clear target.

Next, it is determined from the state of the third input port 124 whether or not the probability setting value is being changed (step S21). If the probability setting value is being changed (step S21; Y), the process proceeds to step S50 (see FIG. 8), and if the probability setting value is not being changed (step S21; N), the process proceeds to step S22.

Next, it is determined from the state of the third input port 124 whether or not the main body frame (front frame) 12 is in the open state (step S22). When the main body frame 12 is in the open state (step S22; Y), the process proceeds to step S23, and when the main body frame 12 is not in the open state (step S22; N), the process proceeds to step S24.

Next, it is determined from the state of the third input port 124 whether or not the setting key switch 127 is in the ON state (step S23). When the setting key switch 127 is in the ON state (step S23; Y), the process proceeds to step S50, and when the setting key switch 127 is not in the ON state (step S23; N), the process proceeds to step S24.

Next, it is determined from the state of the third input port 124 whether or not the set value change switch 126 is in the ON state (step S24). When the set value change switch 126 is in the ON state (step S24; Y), the process proceeds to step S56, and when the set value change switch 126 is not in the ON state (step S24; N), the process proceeds to step S25.

Next, it is determined from the state of the third input port 124 whether or not the RAM initialization switch 112 is in the ON state (step S25). When the RAM initialization switch 112 is in the ON state (step S25; Y), the process proceeds to step S59, and when the RAM initialization switch 112 is not in the ON state (step S25; N), the process proceeds to step S26 (FIG. 7). , Performs processing when the power is restored normally.

If it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step S16; N or step S17; N), or if the checksum is determined to be abnormal (step S19; N), the step is taken. It shifts to S46 and guides the RAM clear by changing the setting.

Next, when the process proceeds to step S26, the initial value at the time of power failure recovery is saved in the area to be initialized (step S26), and the special figure status (state indicated by the data set in the special figure status area described later) indicates. ) Is referred to to determine whether or not the special figure game is in high probability (step S27). Then, when the special figure game is in high probability (step S27; Y), the process proceeds to step S28, and when the special figure game is not in high probability (step S27; N), the process proceeds to step S30.

When the special figure game is in high probability, the on information is saved in the high probability notification flag area (step S28), and the on data of the high probability notification LED is saved in the segment area (step S29).

Next, the command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the special figure game processing number is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S31.
Here, the areas to be initialized in step S26 are a power failure inspection area, a checksum area, and an area related to error fraud monitoring. In step S26, the busy signal status area for storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept the command, is also cleared, and the state of the payout busy signal is confirmed. It is an indefinite state indicating that there is no such thing. Similarly, the touch switch signal state monitoring area that stores the state of the touch switch signal is also cleared, and the state of the touch switch signal is set to an indefinite state indicating that the state has not been determined.

Further, in the case of the first embodiment, in step S30, a plurality of commands such as a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a special figure 2 hold number command, a probability information command, a probability setting value information command, and a screen designation command are used. To send. In addition to these commands, depending on the model, information on the number of times of production and information on the number of times of high probability are transmitted. The screen-designated commands are the control states of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game, which are usually being processed (during fluctuation, during big hit (first special game state), during small hit (first). In the case of (2) a state that is neither of the special game states), it is a command to command the display of the customer waiting demo screen, and in other cases, it is a command to command the display of the recovery screen.

In step S31, a process of activating a CTC circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit)) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator) is performed. The CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator includes a frequency dividing circuit that divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, a timer interrupt signal having a predetermined period (for example, 4 msec) with respect to the CPU 111A based on the divided signal, and a timer interrupt signal. It includes a CTC circuit that generates a signal CTC that triggers a random number update to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

After the CTC activation process in step S31, a process for activating and setting the random number generation circuit is performed (step S32). Specifically, the CPU 111A sets a code (designated value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. In addition, the bit transposition pattern of the hard random number (here, the jackpot random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is also set. The bit transposition pattern is a pattern that defines how to replace the extracted random number bits (arrangement before bit transposition) when they are exchanged in a predetermined order and stored as different bit arrangements (arrangement after bit transposition). be. By exchanging the bits of the random number according to this bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be improved. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern, or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. In addition, the user may be able to set it arbitrarily.

After that, the values of the predetermined registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at the time of turning on the power are extracted, and the corresponding initial value random numbers (in the case of the first embodiment, the big hit symbol initial value random number, small). After saving in a predetermined area of the RWM as the initial value (start value) of the hit symbol initial value random number, the hit initial value random number, and the hit symbol initial value random number (step S33), the interrupt is permitted (step S34).

Here, the "big hit symbol initial value random number" is a random number that is the initial value of the random number (big hit symbol random number) that determines the big hit stop symbol of the special symbol, and the "small hit symbol initial value random number" is the small hit stop of the special symbol. It is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the symbol (small hit symbol random number). In addition, the "hit initial value random number" is a random number that is the initial value of the random number (hit random number) that determines the hit of the normal figure fluctuation game, and the "hit symbol initial value random number" determines the hit symbol of the normal figure fluctuation game. It is a random number that is the initial value of a random number (hit symbol random number). The small hit symbol random number does not exist in the model without the small hit, and the hit symbol initial value random number may not exist depending on the model.

Further, in the random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in the first embodiment, since the initial value of the soft random number register is configured to change each time the power is turned on, this value is used as the initial value of various initial value random numbers ( By setting the start value), the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software can be broken, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to acquire an illegal random number.

Subsequently, the initial value random number update process (step S35) for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers is performed. This initial value random number update process is a process of updating (incrementing) each initial value random number by, for example, "+1". In this way, the randomness of the random numbers can be increased by continuously updating the initial value random numbers as long as time allows in the main process.

Although not particularly limited, in the first embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number use the random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. It is configured to generate. However, the jackpot random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock whose speed is equal to or higher than the operating clock of the CPU. It is a "low-speed counter" that is updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) of timer interrupt processing) that has the same cycle as the timer interrupt processing that is the processing unit. In addition, for big hit symbol random numbers, small hit symbol random numbers, hit random numbers, and hit symbol random numbers, the so-called "initial value change method" is used to change the start value using each initial value random number (generated by software) each time the random number goes around. "Is adopted. It should be noted that each of the above random numbers may be a counter expression update by "+1" or "-1", or a random expression update in which all the values in the range appear separately without duplication until one cycle is completed. That is, the jackpot random number is a random number updated only by the hardware, and the jackpot symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number are random numbers updated by the hardware and software.

After the initial value random number update process in step S35, the number of times (for example, twice) to read and check the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus is set (step S36), and power failure monitoring is performed. It is determined whether the signal is on (step S37). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S37; N), the process returns to the initial value random number update process (step S35). That is, when a power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number update process and the power failure monitoring signal check (loop process) are repeated. By permitting an interrupt before the initial value random number update process (step S35) (step S34), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is preferentially executed, and the timer interrupt is executed. It is possible to prevent the interrupt processing from being overwhelmed by waiting for the initial value random number update processing.

In the initial value random number update process in step S35, in addition to the main process, there is also a method of performing the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process. If such a method is adopted, both of them are used. In order to avoid executing the initial value random number update process, when performing the initial value random number update process in the main process, it is necessary to disable the interrupt and then update to release the interrupt. When the initial value random number update process is not performed in the timer interrupt process as in the embodiment and only in the main process, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update process. This has the advantage of simplifying the main process.

When the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S37; Y), it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is continuously on for the number of checks set in step S36 (step S38). Then, when the power failure monitoring signal has not been turned on for the number of checks (step S38; N), the process returns to the determination of whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S37). Further, when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously on for the number of checks (step S38; Y), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the process of temporarily disabling interrupts (step S39) is complete. The process of outputting off-data to the output port (step S40) is performed.

After that, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (step S41), and the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (step S42). Further, after performing a checksum calculation process (step S43) for calculating the checksum when the power of the RWM is turned off and a process (step S44) for saving the calculated checksum in the checksum area, access to the RAM is prohibited. After performing the process (step S45), it waits for the power of the gaming machine to be cut off. In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum when the power is turned off, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before the power is cut off is correctly backed up. It can be determined at the time of re-input.

Next, when it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step S16; N or step S17; N), or when the checksum is determined to be abnormal (step S19; N), Guidance for clearing the RAM by changing the settings performed in step S46 and subsequent steps will be described.

When guiding the RAM clear by changing the setting, the RAM clear start address 1 is set as the start address at the time of RAM clear (step S46). The RAM clear start address 1 is the start address of the game control area. The RAM clear start address 1 is an address that designates the entire game control work area and the game control stack area as clear targets.

Next, it is determined from the state of the third input port 124 whether or not the main body frame (front frame) 12 is in the open state (step S47). When the main body frame 12 is in the open state (step S47; Y), the process proceeds to step S48, and when the main body frame 12 is not in the open state (step S47; N), the process proceeds to step S49.

Next, it is determined from the state of the third input port 124 whether or not the setting key switch 127 is in the ON state (step S48). When the setting key switch 127 is in the ON state (step S48; Y), the process proceeds to step S50, and when the setting key switch 127 is not in the ON state (step S48; N), the process proceeds to step S49.

In step S49, the command for instructing the setting change is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) to guide the RAM clear by changing the setting via the effect control device 300. For example, the gaming machine 10 guides the RAM clear by changing the setting by the guidance display by the display device 41 and the guidance sound (including voice) output by the speakers 19a and 19b.

The gaming machine 10 is guided to clear the RAM by changing the setting, and then performs a process (step S45) of prohibiting access to the RAM without saving the check data in the power failure inspection area, and then the power of the gaming machine is turned on. Wait for it to be cut off. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can prevent the set value from being initialized at a timing unintended by the administrator by prompting the setting change prior to the initialization when the data is abnormal.

Next, when it is determined that the probability setting value is being changed (step S21; Y) or when it is determined that the setting key switch 127 is in the ON state (step S23; Y, step S48; Y), the step The process related to the probability setting value change performed in S50 or later will be described.

In the process related to the probability setting value change, the data in the clear target area (game control work area) in the storage area (area not including the access prohibited area) of the RWM (for example, RAM111C) is cleared to zero (step S50), and the initial stage is set. The initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be converted (step S51). The initial value saved in step S51 includes information (for example, a timer value) for outputting a security signal after the start of changing the set value. The security signal may be output only for a predetermined time, or may be continuously output while the set value is being changed.

Further, the probability setting value changing flag is set (step S52). The probability setting value changing flag indicates that the probability setting value is being changed in the set state, and indicates that the probability setting value is not being changed in the reset state.

Further, the probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value is saved in the probability setting value display data area (step S53), the value in the probability setting value area is loaded, and the value is saved in the working probability setting value area (step S54). ).

Further, by transmitting a command for which the probability setting is being changed (for example, a command for changing the (probability setting)) to the effect control board (effect control device 300), the effect control device 300 is notified that the probability setting is being changed. Notify (step S55). When the process related to the probability setting value change up to step S55 is executed, the process proceeds to step S31.

Next, when the set value change switch 126 is in the ON state (step S24; Y), the processing related to RAM initialization performed in step S56 and subsequent steps will be described. In the process related to RAM initialization, the RAM clear start address 2 is set as the start address at the time of RAM clear (step S56). The RAM clear start address 2 is an address that excludes the probability set value area from being cleared.

Further, the data in the clear target area (game control work area) in the storage area (area not including the access prohibited area) of the RWM (for example, RAM111C) is cleared to zero (step S57), and the RAM is initially set in the area to be initialized. The initial value at the time of conversion is saved (step S58).

Further, the command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S59), and the process proceeds to step S31. In the case of the first embodiment, in step S59, a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a special figure 2 hold number command, a probability information command, a probability setting value information command, and a RAM initialization command (customer waiting demo screen). Is displayed, and a plurality of commands such as a command for notifying RAM initialization by light and sound for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) are transmitted. In addition to these commands, depending on the model, information on the number of times of production and information on the number of times of high probability are transmitted.

From the above, a main control means (game control device 100) that comprehensively controls the game and a subordinate control means (payout control device 200, effect control device 300) that performs various controls according to instructions from the main control means. Etc.), the main control means sets a predetermined standby time for delaying the start of the main control means and waiting for the start of the slave control device when the power is turned on (game control). The device 100) and a power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the predetermined standby time are provided.

Further, a power supply device 400 for supplying electric power to various devices is provided, and the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) is , It is determined that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period.

Further, in the main control means (game control device 100), the RAM 111C capable of storing data, the initialization operation unit (RAM initialization switch 112) capable of being operated from the outside, and the initialization operation unit are operated. An initialization means (game control device 100) for initializing the data stored in the RAM 111C based on the RAM 111C is provided, and the operation state of the initialization operation unit is read before the start of the standby time.

The game control device 100 of the first embodiment divides the initialization process at the time of data abnormality (first initialization process) and the initialization process at the time of initialization operation (second initialization process). Since it has functions (first initialization means, second initialization means) to be executed separately, it is possible to realize the optimum and lean initialization processing according to the situation.

Further, the main control means (game control device 100) is operated by a RAM 111C capable of storing data, a setting operation unit (setting value change switch 126, setting key switch 127) capable of being operated from the outside, and a setting operation unit. The setting can be changed by providing the setting changing means (game control device 100) for changing the setting value stored in the RAM 111C based on the setting, and the setting display unit (probability setting value display device 136) is provided. This makes it possible to check the settings (set values).

Further, the main control means (game control device 100) is configured to allow access to the RAM 111C after the standby time has elapsed.
[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt processing of the game control device 100 will be described. FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the first embodiment. This timer interrupt process is an interrupt process that occurs between the time when the interrupt is enabled and the time when the interrupt is disabled (steps S34 to S39) in the above-mentioned main process. The timer interrupt process is a process executed by the CPU 111A.

The timer interrupt process is started by inputting a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator to the CPU 111A. When a timer interrupt occurs in the game microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled and the timer interrupt process is started.

When the timer interrupt processing is started, first, the register bank 1 is specified (step S61). By switching to the register bank 1, it is equivalent to performing a register save process of transferring the value held in a predetermined register (for example, the register used in the main process) to the RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (for example, the D register) (step S62). In step S62, the same processing as in step S4 in the main processing is performed, but the register banks are different. Next, input from various sensors and switches and signal acquisition, that is, input processing for reading the state of each input port (step S63) are performed. Then, based on the output data set in various processes, the output process (step S64) for performing the drive control and the like of the actuators such as the solenoids (large winning opening solenoid 38b, normal electric solenoid 37c) is performed. When the firing stop signal is output in step S5 in the main processing, the firing permission signal is output by performing this output processing, and the firing permission signal can be set to the permitted state. This launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device. At that time, the signal is not processed. Further, the launch permission signal is a first signal indicating the launch permission status as seen from the game control device 100, and a second signal (launch permission signal) indicating the launch permission status as seen from the payout control device 200. Is also generated in the payout control device 200 and output to the launch control device. That is, when two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device and both are permitted to launch, the game ball is configured to be ready for launch.

Next, the random number update process 1 (step S65) and the random number update process 2 (step S66) are performed. Here, the random number update process 1 is a process for updating the initial value (start value) of the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number, which are the targets of the initial value random number update process. .. Further, the random number update process 2 is a process of updating the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display game of the special figures 1 and 2. In addition to the random number update process 1 or the random number update process 1, the random number update process 2 may stop the random number update during the setting change or change the update cycle.

After that, monitoring of whether or not there is a normal signal input from the starting port 1 switch 36a, 37a, the starting port 2 switch 92a, the gate switch 34a in the normal figure, the winning port switch 35a, and the large winning port switch 38a, and error The winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step S67) for monitoring (whether the front frame or the glass frame is open, etc.) is performed. Further, the start port switch monitoring process (step S68) for monitoring the winning of the start port 1 switches 36a and 37a and the start port 2 switch 92a is performed. In the start port switch monitoring process, if there is a game ball winning in the start winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37 forming the first starting winning opening, or the starting winning opening 92 forming the second starting winning opening, various random numbers are generated. (Big hit random numbers, etc.) are extracted, and the game result is preliminarily determined based on the prize at the stage before the start of the special figure variation display game.

Next, in step S69, the probability setting value change process relating to the change of the probability setting value is performed. In step S70, the probability setting value changing flag is referred to, it is determined whether or not the probability setting value is being changed, and if the probability setting value is being changed (step S70; Y), the process proceeds to step S75 to set the probability. If the value is not being changed (step S70; N), the process proceeds to step S71. In step S71, the probability setting value confirmation mode flag is referred to, it is determined whether or not the probability setting value confirmation mode is in progress, and if the probability setting value confirmation mode is in progress (step S71; Y), the process proceeds to step S75. If the probability setting value confirmation mode is not in progress (step S71; N), the process proceeds to step S72. The probability setting value confirmation mode flag is a flag that is set or reset in the probability setting value confirmation process described later.

Next, a payout command transmission process (step S72) that outputs commands set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200, a special figure 1 game process (step S73a) that performs a process related to the special figure 1 variable display game, and a special figure 1 game process. Special Figure 2 Performs processing related to the variable display game Special Figure 2 game processing (step S73b) and normal drawing game processing (step S74) that performs processing related to the normal figure variable display game.

Next, a segment LED (for example, an LED of the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 of the batch display device 50) provided on the game machine 10 and displaying various information related to the display of the special figure variation display game and the game is desired. From the segment LED editing process (step S75) that drives to display, the magnet fraud monitoring process (step S76) that checks the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 61 and determines whether there is an abnormality, and the panel radio wave sensor 62. The panel radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S77), which checks the detection signal of the above and determines whether or not there is an abnormality, is performed. Then, the external information editing process (step S78) for setting the signals to be output to various external devices in the output buffer and the status display editing output process (step S79) for displaying the status are performed, and the timer interrupt processing is terminated.

Here, in the first embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process of permitting interrupts) and the process of restoring the register bank designation (that is, the process of designating register bank 0) are interrupts. It is automatically performed at the time of return (at the end of timer interrupt processing). Depending on the CPU used, some gaming machines need to be instructed to execute a process for restoring the interrupt disabled state or a process for restoring the register bank designation.

[Output processing]
Next, the details of the output process (step S64) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the output process of the first embodiment. In this output process, first, off-data is output (reset) to the segment output port (third output port 134c) that outputs the segment data of the batch display device 50 (step S81). Next, the data to be output to the solenoid output port (first output port 134a) that outputs the data of the general electric solenoid 37c and the large winning opening solenoid 38b is combined and output (step S82).

Then, the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the batch display device 50 is updated by "+1" in the range of "0" to "3" (step S83), and the LED digit corresponding to the value of the digit counter is updated. The line output data is acquired (step S84). Here, as an example of dynamically lighting the LEDs_d1 to LED_d18 of the batch display device 50, round display, special figure 1 hold display, special figure 1 symbol display, special figure 2 symbol display, normal symbol symbol display, normal figure hold display, and There is a status display (game status display such as a time saving state or a high probability state).

Next, the acquired data and the external information data are combined (step S85), and the combined data is output to the digit / external information output port (fourth output port 134d) for digit output and external information output (step S86). ). The external information synthesized in step S85 is "door / frame opening" and "security signal".

After that, the output data of the segment line is loaded from the segment area in the RWM corresponding to the value of the digit counter (step S87), and the loaded data is output to the segment output port (third output port 134c) for segment output (3rd output port 134c). Step S88).

Subsequently, various output data of the external information to be output to the external information terminal board 71 are loaded and synthesized (step S89). The external information synthesized here includes "big hit signal 1", "big hit signal 2", "big hit signal 3", "big hit signal 4", "symbol confirmation number signal", "starting port signal", and "main prize ball". Signal "etc. Next, the combined data and the output data of the launch permission are combined (step S90), and the combined data is used as an external information / launch permission signal output port (fifth output port 134e) for external information output and launch permission signal output. Is output to (step S91).

Next, the off output data of the probability setting value display is set. That is, off-data is output (reset) to the probability setting value display output port (second output port 134b) that outputs the probability setting value display data of the probability setting value display device 136 (step S92).

Next, it is determined whether or not the probability set value display permission flag is set (step S93). If the probability set value display permission flag is set (step S93; Y), the process proceeds to step S94, and if the probability set value display permission flag is not set (step S93; N), the process proceeds to step S95.

When the probability set value display permission flag is set, the probability set value display data corresponding to the probability set value is loaded from the set value display data area in the RWM (step S94).
In step S95, the probability set value display data is output to the probability set value display output port (second output port 134b).

Next, the data to be output to the test signal output port 1 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the combined data is output to the test signal output port 1 on the relay board 70. (Step S96). After that, the data to be output to the test signal output port 2 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test signal output port 2 on the relay board 70. (Step S97).

Next, the data to be output to the test signal output port 3 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the combined data is output to the test signal output port 3 on the relay board 70. (Step S98). Further, the data to be output to the test signal output port 4 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal of the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test signal output port 4 on the relay board 70 ( Step S99). Then, the data to be output to the test signal output port 5 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the combined data is output to the test signal output port 5 on the relay board 70 ( Step S9a).

Next, the test signal output data of the probability set value is loaded (step S9b). The test signal output data loads the probability set value display data (for example, 7-segment data) corresponding to the probability set value from the set value display data area in the RWM, but the probability set value can be confirmed. If there is, it may be a probability setting value (for example, a numerical value from 1 to 6) or data in other formats.

Next, it is determined from the state of the third input port 124 whether or not the setting key switch 127 is in the ON state (step S9c). When the setting key switch 127 is in the ON state (step S9c; Y), the process proceeds to step S9d, and when the setting key switch 127 is not in the ON state (step S9c; N), the process proceeds to step S9e.

When the setting key switch 127 is in the ON state, the test signal output data of the loaded probability setting value and the setting key switch on information are combined (step S9d).
In step S9e, the synthesized data is output to the test signal output port 6 on the relay board 70, and the output process is completed.

[Winning opening switch / status monitoring process]
Next, the winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step S67) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 9) will be described. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the winning opening switch / state monitoring process of the first embodiment. In this winning opening switch / state monitoring process, first, the probability setting value changing flag is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the probability setting value is being changed (step S101). If the probability setting value is being changed (step S101; Y), the process proceeds to step S109, and if the probability setting value is not being changed (step S101; N), the process proceeds to step S102. In step S102, the probability setting value confirmation mode flag is referred to, it is determined whether or not the probability setting value confirmation mode is in progress, and if the probability setting value confirmation mode is in progress (step S102; Y), the process proceeds to step S109. If the probability setting value confirmation mode is not in progress (step S102; N), the process proceeds to step S103.

Next, the winning opening monitoring table 1 (for example, the port number into which the detection signal from the count switch is input) corresponding to the large winning opening switch 38a (count switch) in the large winning opening (special variable winning device 38) or the like. (The data indicating the bit position and the like in the signal port is stored) is prepared (step S103). Next, the fraud & prize monitoring process (step S104) is executed to monitor whether there is any fraud (illegal winning) to win the grand prize even though the grand prize opening is not open and to detect a normal winning. ..

After that, the winning opening monitoring table of the winning opening switch (starting opening 1 switch 37a) in the Fuden is prepared (step S105), and fraudulent & winning monitoring processing (step S105) is performed to monitor whether or not there is an illegal winning and to detect a normal winning. Step S106) is executed.

Next, the winning opening switch that does not require fraud monitoring processing, that is, the winning opening switch that can always win (here, the starting opening 1 switch 36a, the starting opening 2 switch 92a, and the winning opening switch 35a of the general winning opening 35) is monitored. The table is prepared (step S107), and the winning number counter update process (step S108) for updating the winning number is performed.

Next, the value of the status scan counter for sequentially designating which of the plurality of switches and signals for monitoring the error status of the gaming machine 10 is to be monitored this time is set to "0". To update in the range of "3" (step S109). After that, depending on the value of the status scan counter, any of the switch error 1 error output due to the occurrence of the switch connector disconnection, the shoot ball out error from the payout control device 200, the overflow error from the overflow switch, and the payout error error. The game machine state monitoring table 1 for setting the monitoring of errors based on the crab is prepared (step S110). Then, the gaming machine state check process (step S111) for determining whether or not an error has occurred is performed.

Next, a gaming machine status monitoring table 2 is prepared for setting the monitoring of errors based on any of the glass frame opening, the main body frame opening, the frame radio wave fraud, and the touch switch according to the value of the status scan counter. (Step S112). Then, the gaming machine state check process (step S113) for determining whether or not an error has occurred is performed.

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the status scan counter is "0" (step S114), and if the value of the status scan counter is not "0" (step S114; N), the winning opening switch / status monitoring End the process. In this case, there is no monitoring target of the gaming machine status in the gaming machine status monitoring table 3 to be referred to next. When the value of the status scan counter is "0" (step S114; Y), the gaming machine state based on the switch error 2 error output due to the occurrence of the switch connector disconnection or the like according to the value of the status scan counter. The gaming machine state monitoring table 3 for setting the monitoring of the above is prepared (step S115). Then, the gaming machine state check process (step S116) for determining whether or not an error has occurred is performed, the payout busy signal check process (step S117) is performed, and the winning opening switch / state monitoring process is completed. It should be noted that the payout busy signal check process is not performed every time, but is executed once every four times, and the remaining three times are passed, so that the monitoring has a 16 ms cycle.

[Probability setting value change processing]
Next, the details of the probability set value change process (step S69) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the probability set value changing process of the first embodiment.

First, the probability setting value changing flag is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the probability setting value is being changed (step S121). If the probability setting value is being changed (step S121; Y), the process proceeds to step S123, and if the probability setting value is not being changed (step S121; N), the process proceeds to step S122, and the probability setting value confirmation process (step S122) is executed. After that, the probability setting value change process is terminated. The details of the probability set value confirmation process will be described later with reference to FIG.

If the probability set value is being changed, the probability set value off timer is updated. Specifically, the value of the probability set value extinguishing timer is referred to, and when the value of the probability set value extinguishing timer is not "0", the value of the probability set value extinguishing timer is updated by decrementing "1" (step S123). ..

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the probability set value extinguishing timer is "0" (step S124), and when the value of the probability set value extinguishing timer is "0" (step S124; Y), step S125. If the value of the probability set value extinguishing timer is not “0” (step S124; N), the process proceeds to step S126.

Next, it is determined whether or not the probability setting value has been changed by referring to the probability setting value changed flag (step S126), and if the probability setting value has been changed, the process proceeds to step S127, and if the probability setting value has not been changed. Proceed to step S133. The probability setting value changed flag is a flag that is set when the probability setting value is changed (probability setting value confirmation operation).

When the probability set value has been changed (step S126; Y), it is determined from the state of the third input port 124 whether or not the setting key switch 127 is in the OFF state (step S127). When the setting key switch 127 is in the OFF state (step S127; Y), the process related to RAM initialization after changing the probability set value is performed in step S128 or later, and when the setting key switch 127 is not in the OFF state (step S127; N). ) Ends the probability setting value change process.

Next, when the setting key switch 127 is in the OFF state (step S127; Y), the processing related to RAM initialization performed in step S128 and subsequent steps will be described. In the process related to RAM initialization, the RAM clear start address 3 is set as the start address at the time of RAM clear (step S128). The RAM clear start address 3 is an address that excludes the probability set value area, the random number area for fluctuation patterns (random numbers updated by the random number update process 2), and the initial value random number area. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can effectively utilize the random number stirring during the setting change. The RAM clear start address 3 may be an address in which the probability set value area is excluded from the clear target and the variation pattern random number area and the initial value random number area are included in the clear target.

Next, the RAM area to be cleared is cleared to zero (step S129), and the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (step S130). The initial value saved in step S130 includes information for outputting a security signal (for example, a timer value). The security signal may be output only for a predetermined time, or may be continuously output while the set value is being changed.

Next, the probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value is saved in the probability setting value display data area (step S131). By including the information related to the setting change (for example, the probability setting value display data, etc.) in the RAM clear target, the probability setting value after the probability setting value is changed and the information related to the setting change before the probability setting value is changed. Inconsistency can be prevented.

Further, the command for completing the probability setting change is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S132), and the process proceeds to step S34 (see FIG. 7) of the main process. In the case of the first embodiment, in step S132, a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a special figure 2 hold number command, a probability information command, a probability setting value information command, and a command to end the probability setting change (customer waiting demo). Along with displaying the screen, a plurality of commands such as a command for notifying the RAM initialization by light and sound for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) are transmitted. In addition to these commands, depending on the model, information on the number of times of production and information on the number of times of high probability are transmitted. The command for ending the probability setting change may also serve as a RAM clear notification in addition to the notification of the end of the probability setting change or in place of the notification of the end of the probability setting change. Further, in step S132, a RAM initialization command may be transmitted in addition to the command for ending the probability setting change or in place of the command for ending the probability setting change.

If the probability set value has not been changed (step S126; N), the processes after step S133 are performed. In step S133, it is determined whether or not there is an input from the set value change switch 126 (step S133). If there is an input from the set value change switch 126, the process proceeds to step S134, and if there is no input from the set value change switch 126 (step S133; N), the process proceeds to step S137.

When there is an input from the setting value change switch 126 (step S133; Y), the value in the working probability setting value area (working probability setting value) is incremented by "1", and the range is in the range of "0" to "5". Update cyclically with (step S134). The probability setting value for work is set to 6 stages from "0" to "5", but is not limited to this, and may be 3 stages, 10 stages, or the like as long as it is a value corresponding to the probability setting value. Further, although the working probability setting value has a one-to-one correspondence with the probability setting value, it may have a one-to-many correspondence relationship with the probability setting value. For example, when the probability setting value is in 3 stages from "0" to "2", the work probability setting value is set in 6 stages from "0" to "5", and the probability setting values are "0", "1", and " The work probability setting values "0, 1", "2, 3", and "4,5" may be associated with each of "2".

Next, the probability setting value display data corresponding to the working probability setting value is saved in the probability setting value display data area (step S135), and the initial value (for example, 100 ms) is saved in the probability setting value extinguishing timer area (step). S136). The probability set value extinguishing timer area is an area for providing a blank display on the probability set value display device 136. As a result, the probability set value display device 136 can perform a blank display every time there is a set value change operation (input from the set value change switch 126).

Next, in step S137, it is determined whether or not there is a confirmation operation for changing the set value. For example, the confirmation operation of changing the set value can be a touch switch signal. The setting value change confirmation operation may use an input different from the touch switch signal, an input signal may be used from a dedicated operation switch provided separately, or an input from two or more switches may be used. A signal combination or the like may be used. If there is a confirmation operation for changing the set value, the process proceeds to step S138, and if there is no confirmation operation for changing the set value (step S137; N), the probability setting value change process ends.

When there is a confirmation operation of changing the set value (step S137; Y), the value in the probability setting value area for work is loaded, saved in the probability setting value area (step S138), and the probability setting value corresponding to the probability setting value is displayed. The data is saved in the probability setting value display data area (step S139), and the probability setting value changed flag is set (step S140).

Further, a command for changing the probability set value is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S141), and the probability set value change process is completed. In the case of the first embodiment, in step S141, a command for changing the probability set value (for displaying the customer waiting demo screen and notifying the change of the probability set value with light and sound for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds)). In addition to the command), a plurality of commands such as a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a special figure 2 hold number command, a probability information command, and a probability setting value information command may be transmitted. Further, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, information on the number of times of production and information on the number of times of high probability may be transmitted.

[Probability set value confirmation process]
Next, the details of the probability set value confirmation process (step S122) in the above-mentioned probability set value change process will be described. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the probability set value confirmation process of the first embodiment.

In step S151, the probability setting value confirmation mode flag is referred to, it is determined whether or not the probability setting value confirmation mode is in progress, and if the probability setting value confirmation mode is in progress (step S151; Y), the process proceeds to step S159. If the probability set value confirmation mode is not in progress, the process proceeds to step S152.

If the probability setting value confirmation mode is not in progress (step S151; N), the probability setting value display permission flag is cleared (step S152), it is determined whether or not the game is in progress (step S153), and if the game is not in progress, the step is taken. Proceed to S154, and when the game is in progress (step S153; Y), the probability set value confirmation process is terminated. The term “during the game” refers to a game state in which the player is highly likely to be playing, and includes, for example, a special figure changing, a normal figure changing, a special figure hitting, a normal drawing hitting, and the like. Further, the term “during the game” may include a gaming state in which the number of the special figure 1 hold and the number of the special figure 2 hold are present.

When not in the game (step S153; N), it is determined from the state of the third input port 124 whether or not the setting key switch 127 is in the ON state (step S154). If the setting key switch 127 is in the ON state, the process proceeds to step S155, and if the setting key switch 127 is not in the ON state (step S154; N), the probability setting value confirmation process ends.

When the setting key switch 127 is in the ON state (step S154; Y), the probability setting value confirmation mode flag is set (step S155), the probability setting value display permission flag is set (step S156), and the security signal control timer is set. The initial value is saved in the area (step S157). By saving the initial value in the security signal control timer area, the security signal is output for the probability set value display time set as the initial value. The security signal is not limited to the probability set value display time set as the initial value, and may be continuously output during the probability set value confirmation mode.

Further, a command for confirming the probability set value is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S158), and the probability set value confirmation process is completed. In the case of the first embodiment, in step S158, a command for confirming the probability set value (for displaying the customer waiting demo screen and notifying the confirmation of the probability set value with light and sound for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds)). In addition to the command), a plurality of commands such as a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a special figure 2 hold number command, a probability information command, and a probability setting value information command may be transmitted. Further, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, information on the number of times of production and information on the number of times of high probability may be transmitted.

When the probability setting value confirmation mode is in progress (step S151; Y), it is determined from the state of the third input port 124 whether or not the setting key switch 127 is in the ON state (step S159). If the setting key switch 127 is not in the ON state, the process proceeds to step S160, and if the setting key switch 127 is in the ON state (step S159; Y), the probability setting value confirmation process ends.

When the setting key switch 127 is not in the ON state (step S159; N), the probability setting value confirmation mode flag is cleared (step S160), and the probability setting value display permission flag is cleared (step S161).

Further, the command for ending the probability set value confirmation is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S162), and the probability set value confirmation process is completed. In the case of the first embodiment, in step S162, a command for completing the probability set value confirmation (to display the customer waiting demo screen and to notify the probability set value confirmation with light and sound for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds)). In addition to the above command), a plurality of commands such as a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a special figure 2 hold number command, a probability information command, and a probability setting value information command may be transmitted. Further, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, information on the number of times of production and information on the number of times of high probability may be transmitted.

Next, the memory map of the RAM 111C will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a diagram showing an example of a memory map of the game control device of the first embodiment. The memory map 111M is a memory map of the RAM 111C. The RAM 111C sets a game control work area, a game control stack area, a status display work area, and a status display stack area in order from the beginning of the memory. Further, the RAM 111C clearly separates the game control stack area and the status display work area by setting an unused area of 16 bytes or more between the game control stack area and the status display work area. Further, although the RAM 111C sets an unused area after the status display stack area, the state display stack area may be set so as to include the end of the memory without providing the unused area. Further, the RAM 111C may set an unused area between the game control work area and the game control stack area, or between the state display work area and the state display stack area.

Since the probability setting value area is arranged at the head of the game control work area, the RAM clear start address 1 covers all the game control work areas (game control work area) and the game control stack area. do. Further, the RAM clear start address 2 targets the game control work area and the game control stack area excluding the probability set value area. Further, the RAM clear start address 3 targets the game control work area and the game control stack area excluding the probability set value area, the fluctuation pattern random number area, and the initial value random number area. Further, all of the RAM clear start address 1, the RAM clear start address 2, and the RAM clear start address 3 target the area from the power failure inspection area 1 to the power failure inspection area 2 and the checksum area.

[Payout command transmission process]
Next, the details of the payout command transmission process (step S72) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. FIG. 15 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the payout command transmission process of the first embodiment. Further, FIG. 16 is a diagram showing a structural example of the winning number counter area of the first embodiment.

First, an example of the winning number counter area will be described. As shown in FIG. 16, for example, the winning number counter area 1 includes 3 prize ball counters, 10 prize ball counters, and 14 prize ball counters, respectively. The winning number counter can store up to 65535 winnings. Next, as shown in FIG. 16, the prize number counter area 2 includes 3 prize ball counters, 10 prize ball counters, and 14 prize ball counters, and each prize number counter can store up to 255 prizes. It has become. In checking the count number of the prize number counter area, the above-mentioned counters are checked in order from the top (from the three prize ball counters) by updating the address of the prize number counter area in step S202 or the like described later.

Next, in FIG. 15, the left column is a process of updating (increasing) the number of times the main prize ball signal is output, and the right column is a process of transmitting a payout command.
In the payout command transmission process, first, as described with reference to FIG. 16, the counters of the plurality of prize number counter areas 2 provided for each prize ball number (for example, 3 prize balls, 10 prize balls, 14 prize balls). Among them, it is determined whether or not the counter to be checked has a count number other than "0" (step S201). Then, when there is no count number (step S201; N), the address of the winning number counter area 2 to be checked is updated (step S202), and the check of the count numbers of all the counters in the winning number counter area 2 is completed. Whether or not it is determined (step S203).

If it is determined in step S201 that there is a count number (step S201; Y), the count number of the counter in the target winning number counter area 2 is subtracted (updated to "-1") (step S204), and the winning number counter. The number of payouts corresponding to the address of the area 2 (for example, any of the above-mentioned 3, 10, and 14) is acquired (step S205). Next, the value of the remaining number of prize balls area and the number of payouts are added (step S206), the addition result is saved in the remaining number of prize balls area (step S207), and 10 is subtracted from the addition result (step S208). It is determined whether the subtraction result is “0” or more (step S209). If the subtraction result is determined to be "0" or more (step S209; Y) in step S209, the number of main prize ball signal outputs is updated by "+1" (step S210), and the subtraction result is saved in the prize ball remaining number area. (Step S211).

In the main prize ball signal editing process in the external information editing process described later, a process of outputting the main prize ball signal is performed based on the number of times the main prize ball signal is output updated in step S210. Here, as the prize ball signal (main prize ball signal), one pulse is output from the main board (game control device 100) for every 10 scheduled payouts, and 10 pieces are paid out from the payout board (payout control device 200). One pulse is output for each.

Next, in the determination of step S203, it is determined that all the checks have been completed (step S203; Y), or in the determination of step S209, it is determined that the subtraction result is not "0" or more (step S209; N). In this case, if the value of the payout command transmission timer is not "0", the value of the payout command transmission timer is updated to "-1" (step S212). If this payout command transmission process is the first timer interrupt process, the value of the payout command transmission timer is "0" because the initial value set in the final step S221 of this payout command transmission process is not set. Therefore, the subtraction will not be performed.

Next, when it is determined whether or not the value of the payout command transmission timer is "0" (step S213), and when it is determined that the value of the payout command transmission timer is "0" (step S213; Y), It is determined whether or not the payout busy signal is busy (step S214). Whether or not the payout busy signal is busy is determined not by referring to the state of the port but by referring to the payout busy signal flag. Here, the conditions for the payout busy signal to be on (busy) are "payout operation", "ball lending operation", "shoot ball out error", "overflow error", and "frame radio wave fraud occurrence". "Medium", "Abnormal payout ball detection switch (switch to monitor paid out balls)", "Insufficient payout error", "Overpayment error", "Prize to be paid out in the memory of the payout control board" When there is a count of the number of balls (the number of unpaid prize balls = the remaining number of acquired game balls) (when it is not 0) "and the like.

Next, when the payout busy signal is not busy (step S214; N), it is determined whether or not the target counter in the winning number counter area 1 has a count (step S215), and the target counter in the winning number counter area 1 is determined. If there is no count in (step S215; N), the address of the winning number counter area 1 to be checked is updated (step S216), and it is determined whether or not the check of all areas is completed (step S217). If the check of all areas has not been completed (step S217; N), the process returns to step S215.

In step S215, when the target counter in the winning number counter area 1 has a count (step S215; Y), the target winning number counter is updated to "-1" (step S218) to the address of the winning number counter area 1. The corresponding payout number command is acquired (step S219), and the acquired command is written to the payout serial transmission buffer (step S220). Then, the initial value (for example, 200 ms) is saved in the payout command transmission timer area (step S221).

When it is determined in step S213 that the value of the payout command transmission timer is not "0" (step S213; N), and in step S214, it is determined that the payout busy signal is busy (step S214; Y). , When it is determined in step S217 that the check of all areas is completed (step S217; Y), or when the process of step S221 is completed, this payout command transmission process is terminated.

As can be seen from the configuration in which the processing is terminated without executing steps S215 and subsequent steps depending on the determination results of steps S213 and S214, the payout command is not transmitted for each timer interrupt, but a predetermined time elapses. I have sent it since then. Further, the transmission of the payout command is also a condition that the payout control board side is in a state where the prize ball can be paid out.

[Starting port switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the start port switch monitoring process (step S68) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the start port switch monitoring process of the first embodiment.

In the start port switch monitoring process, first, the winning monitoring table of the starting port 1 (starting winning port 36, normal variable winning device 37) is prepared (step A101), and the hard random number acquisition process (step A102) is performed to perform the starting port switch monitoring process. It is determined whether or not there is a prize in 1 (step A103).

If it is determined in step A103 that there is no winning in the starting port 1 (step A103; N), the process proceeds to step A109, and subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A103 that there is a prize in the starting port 1 (step A103; Y), the game state is a predetermined state in which the game state should be right-handed (for example, a normal electric support state, a big hit, etc.). It is determined whether or not there is (step A104).

If it is determined in step A104 that the state is not a predetermined state to be right-handed (step A104; N), the process proceeds to step A107, and subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A104 that the state should be right-handed (step A104; Y), a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A105), and an effect command setting process (step A106) is performed. To do. That is, in the case of the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, except for the normal electric support state, the starting port 1 is hardly awarded unless it is left-handed, and the starting port 1 is won in the predetermined state where it should be right-handed. In this case, since it can be estimated that the player has hit the left side even though the state should be right-handed, the right-handed instruction notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 issues a notification (warning) instructing the player to hit the right side. It is configured to be done by.

Next, after preparing a table for setting the information of the hold by the start port 1 (step A107), the special figure start port 1 switch process (step A108) is performed.
Next, the winning monitoring table of the starting port 2 (starting winning opening 92) is prepared (step A109), and the hard random number acquisition process (step A110) is performed to determine whether or not there is a winning in the starting opening 2. (Step A111).

If it is determined in step A111 that there is no winning in the starting port 2 (step A111; N), the starting port switch monitoring process is terminated.
On the other hand, in step A111, when it is determined that the starting port 2 has won a prize (step A111; Y), it is determined whether or not the game state is the normal electric support state (time saving state) (step). If it is determined that the A112) is not in the normal power support state (step A112; N), it is determined whether or not the jackpot is in progress (step A113). Further, in step A113, if it is determined that the jackpot is not in progress (step A113; N), it is determined whether or not the special figure variation display game is in the final variation of the normal electric support (step A114).

If it is determined in step A114 that the final change of the normal power support is not in progress (step A114; N), a left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A115), and an effect command setting process (step A116) is performed. That is, if it is not in the normal power support state, the big hit, or the final fluctuation of the normal power support, it should be left-handed, so the process of transmitting the left-handed instruction notification command to the effect control device 300 is performed.

Then, when it is determined in step A112 that the normal electric support state is in the normal electric support state (step A112; Y), and when it is determined in step A113 that the jackpot is in progress (step A113; Y), the general electric support is final in step A114. If it is determined that the fluctuation is in progress (step A114; Y), and if the process of step A116 is completed, the process proceeds to step A117.

When the process proceeds to step A117, after preparing a table for setting the information held by the start port 2 (step A117), the special figure start port 2 switch process (step A118) is performed to end the start port switch monitoring process.

If it is determined in step A111 that there is a prize for the starting port 2, for example, before executing step A112, it is normal for the public electric machine to be illegal (even though the normal variable winning device 37 is closed). A step is provided to determine whether or not there is an illegality in which a prize is detected in the variable winning device 37), and if it is determined that this general electric power illegality is occurring, the start port switch monitoring process is terminated without executing step A112 and subsequent steps. The configuration may be set so that the second start memory (start memory of special figure 2) is not generated any more when there is an illegality of the electric power.

[Hard random number acquisition process]
Next, the details of the hard random number acquisition process (steps A102, A110) in the above-mentioned start port switch monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the hard random number acquisition process of the first embodiment.

In the hard random number acquisition process, first, of the starting port 1 (starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37) and starting opening 2 (starting winning opening 92), the non-winning information of the starting port to be monitored is set ( Step A121), among the start port 1 switches 36a and 37a and the start port 2 switch 92a, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the start port switch to be monitored (step A122). Then, when there is no input to the start port switch to be monitored (step A122; N), the hard random number acquisition process ends. On the other hand, when there is an input to the start port switch to be monitored (step A122; Y), the random number latch register status is read (step A123), and it is determined whether or not the target random number latch register has latch data (step). A124).

If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (step A124; N), that is, if no random number has been extracted, the hard random number acquisition process ends. If there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step A124; Y), the jackpot random number extracted in the monitored hard random number latch register is loaded and prepared (step A125). Then, among the start port 1 and the start port 2, the winning information of the start port to be monitored is set (step A126), and the hard random number acquisition process is completed.

[Special figure start port 1 switch processing]
Next, the details of the special figure start port 1 switch process (step A108) in the above-mentioned start port switch monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a special figure start port 1 switch process of the first embodiment.

The special figure start port 1 switch process is a process performed when there is an input of the start port 1 switches 36a and 37a to be monitored (starting prize of the special figure 1 to be monitored).
In the special figure start port 1 switch process, first, the start port signal 1 output, which is the number of times the information regarding the number of winnings to the start port 1 switches 36a and 37a to be monitored is output to the external management device of the gaming machine 10. The number of times is loaded (step A131), the loaded value is updated by "+1" (step A132), and it is determined whether or not the number of output times overflows (step A133). If the number of outputs does not overflow (step A133; N), the updated value is saved in the RWM start port signal 1 output count area (step A134), and the process proceeds to step A135. On the other hand, when the number of outputs overflows (step A133; Y), the process passes through step A134 and proceeds to the process of step A135. In the first embodiment, a value from "0" to "255" can be stored in the start port signal 1 output frequency region. Then, when the loaded value is "255", when it is updated by "+1", the updated value becomes "0", and it is configured to determine that the number of outputs overflows.

Next, it is determined whether or not the number of special figure 1 hold items (number of start memory of special figure 1) of the update target corresponding to the start port 1 switches 36a and 37a of the monitoring target is less than the upper limit value (for example, less than 4). (Step A135). If the number of special figure 1 hold items to be updated is not less than the upper limit value (step A135; N), the special figure start port 1 switch process is terminated. When the number of special figures 1 to be updated is less than the upper limit (step A135; Y), set the special figure 1 information setting flag used for setting fluctuation information (for example, for sorting look-ahead fluctuation patterns) (step A135; Y). Step A136), the number of special figure 1 holdes to be updated is updated by "+1" (step A137).

Subsequently, the address of the random number storage area (random number storage area for special figure 1) corresponding to the reserved number of special figure 1 is calculated (step A138), and the big hit random number prepared in step A125 is used as the big hit random number storage area of RWM. Save to (step A139). Next, the jackpot symbol random number of the special figure 1 is extracted, prepared (step A140), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step A141).

Next, the small hit symbol random number of the special figure 1 is extracted, prepared, saved in the small hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step A142), and the variable pattern random number 1, the variable pattern random number 2, and the variable pattern random number 3 are stored. The variation pattern of the corresponding RWM is saved in the random number storage area (step A143), and the special figure reservation information determination process (step A144) is performed. After that, the decorative special figure 1 hold number command corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number to be monitored is prepared (step A145), the effect command setting process (step A146) is performed, and the special figure start port 1 switch process is completed. ..

Here, the RAM 111C of the gaming microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of the game ball into the starting winning opening 36 and the starting winning area of the normal variable winning device 37, and the special figure variation display game. It is a starting prize storage means that stores a predetermined number up to a predetermined number as a starting memory that is the execution right of. Further, the start winning prize storage means (RAM111C) first starts various random value values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the starting opening 1 (starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37) up to a predetermined number. Remember as a memory.

[Special figure start port 2 switch processing]
Next, the details of the special figure start port 2 switch process (step A118) in the above-mentioned start port switch monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure start port 2 switch processing of the first embodiment.

The special figure start port 2 switch process is a process performed when there is an input of the start port 2 switch 92a to be monitored (starting prize of the special figure 2 to be monitored).
In the special figure start port 2 switch processing, first, the start port signal 2 output number of times, which is the number of times the information regarding the number of times of winning the start port 2 switch 92a is output to the external management device of the gaming machine 10, is loaded ( Step A151), the loaded value is updated by "+1" (step A152), and it is determined whether or not the number of outputs overflows (step A153). When the number of outputs does not overflow (step A153; N), the updated value is saved in the start port signal 2 output count area of the RWM (step A154), and the process proceeds to step A155. On the other hand, when the number of outputs overflows (step A153; Y), the process passes through step A154 and proceeds to the process of step A155. In the first embodiment, a value from "0" to "255" can be stored in the start port signal 2 output frequency region. Then, when the loaded value is "255", when it is updated by "+1", the updated value becomes "0", and it is configured to determine that the number of outputs overflows.

Next, it is determined whether or not the number of special figure 2 hold (starting memory) of the update target corresponding to the start port 2 switch 92a to be monitored is less than the upper limit value (for example, less than 4) (step A155). When the number of special figure 2 hold items to be updated is not less than the upper limit value (step A155; N), the special figure start port 2 switch process is terminated. When the number of special figures 2 to be updated is less than the upper limit (step A155; Y), the special figure 2 information setting flag used for setting fluctuation information (for example, for sorting look-ahead fluctuation patterns) is set ( Step A156), the number of special figures 2 held to be updated is updated by "+1" (step A157).

Subsequently, the address of the random number storage area (random number storage area for special figure 2) corresponding to the reserved number of special figure 2 is calculated (step A158), and the big hit random number prepared in step A125 is used as the big hit random number storage area of RWM. Save to (step A159). Next, the jackpot symbol random number of the special figure 2 is extracted, prepared (step A160), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step A161).

Next, the small hit symbol random number of the special figure 2 is extracted, prepared, saved in the small hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step A162), and the variable pattern random number 1, the variable pattern random number 2, and the variable pattern random number 3 are stored. It is saved in the variation pattern random number storage area of the corresponding RWM (step A163), and the special figure reservation information determination process (step A164) is performed. After that, the decorative special figure 2 hold number command corresponding to the monitoring target special figure 2 hold number is prepared (step A165), the effect command setting process (step A166) is performed, and the special figure start port 2 switch process is completed. ..

Here, the RAM 111C of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of the game ball into the start winning area of the start winning opening 92, and becomes the right to execute the special figure variation display game. It serves as a starting prize storage means for storing a predetermined number as a memory up to a predetermined number. Further, the start winning prize storage means (RAM 111C) stores various random value values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the start opening 2 (start winning opening 92) as the second start storage up to a predetermined number.

[Special figure reservation information judgment processing]
Next, the details of the special figure hold information determination process (step A144, step A164) in the special figure start port 1 switch process and the special figure start port 2 switch process will be described with reference to FIG. 21. FIG. 21 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure reservation information determination process of the first embodiment.

The special figure reservation information determination process is a look-ahead process in which the result-related information corresponding to the start memory is determined before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory.

In the special figure reservation information determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state (high probability medium) (step A172). If it is determined in step A172 that the probability is high (step A172; Y), the special figure reservation information determination process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step A172 that the probability is not high (step A172; N), it is determined whether or not the jackpot is being hit (step A173). If it is determined in step A173 that the jackpot is in progress (step A173; Y), the special figure reservation information determination process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step A173 that the jackpot is not in progress (step A173; N), the jackpot determination process of determining whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot based on whether or not the jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value (step A173; N). Step A174) is performed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the determination result of the jackpot determination process is a jackpot (step A175). Then, when the determination result is a big hit (step A175; Y), the big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target start port switch (in other words, special figure type; special figure 1 or special figure 2 type) is displayed. It is set (step A176), the stop symbol information corresponding to the jackpot symbol random number prepared in step A140 or A160 is acquired (step A177), the process proceeds to step A184, and the subsequent processes are performed.

On the other hand, when the determination result is not a big hit (step A175; N), the small hit determination process (step A179) for determining whether or not the jackpot is a small hit is performed depending on whether or not the jackpot random number value matches the small hit determination value. Do it. After that, it is determined whether or not the determination result of the small hit determination process is a small hit (step A180). Then, when the determination result is not a small hit (step A180; N), the stop symbol information of the loss is set (step A183), the process proceeds to the process of step A184, and the subsequent processes are performed.

On the other hand, when the determination result is a small hit (step A180; Y), a small hit symbol random number check table is set, and the small hit stop symbol information corresponding to the small hit symbol random number prepared in step A142 or A162 is set. (Step A182), the process proceeds to the process of step A184, and the subsequent processes are performed.

Then, when the process proceeds to step A184, a look-ahead stop symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol information acquired or set in any one of step A177, step A182, or step A183 is prepared (step A184), and the effect command setting process (step). Perform A185). Next, the special figure information setting process (step A186) for setting the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern is performed, and the variation pattern setting process (step A187) for setting the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is performed. To do.

After that, the look-ahead fluctuation pattern corresponding to the first half fluctuation number indicating the first half fluctuation pattern (variation pattern until the start of the reach action) and the second half fluctuation number indicating the second half fluctuation pattern (variation pattern after the start of the reach action) in the fluctuation mode of the special figure fluctuation display game. A command is prepared (step A188), an effect command setting process (step A189) is performed, and the special figure reservation information determination process is completed.

The special figure information setting process in step A186 and the variation pattern setting process in step A187 are executed at the start of the special figure variation display game in the special figure normal process (special figure 1 normal process or special figure 2 normal process described later). It is the same as the processing. That is, when the special figure reservation information determination process is executed in step A144, since the special figure type is special figure 1, the processes of steps A186 and A187 are the special figure 1 information setting process and the special figure 1 variation, which will be described later. It is the same as the pattern setting process, and when the special figure reservation information determination process is executed in step A164, the special figure type is special figure 2, so the processes of steps A186 and A187 are the special figure 2 information described later. It is the same as the setting process and the special figure 2 variation pattern setting process.

By the above processing, the pre-reading stop symbol command including the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory of the look-ahead target and the look-ahead variation pattern command including the information of the variation pattern in the special figure variation display game based on the start memory can be obtained. It is prepared and transmitted to the effect control device 300. As a result, the judgment result (look-ahead result) of the result-related information (whether or not it is a big hit and the type of fluctuation pattern) corresponding to the start memory is directed and controlled before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory. The device 300 can be notified, and in particular, the result-related information is provided to the player before the start timing of the special figure variation display game by changing the decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the display device 41. It becomes possible to notify.

That is, the game control device 100 determines a random number stored as a start memory in the start prize storage means (RAM 111C) before executing the variable display game based on the start memory (for example, whether or not a special result is obtained). Judgment) Makes a preliminary judgment means. It should be noted that the time to determine the random number value stored in advance corresponding to the start memory is not only when the start memory occurs but also before the variable display game based on the start memory is played. good.

[Special Figure 1 Game Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 game processing (step S73a) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to FIG. 22. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure 1 game processing of the first embodiment.

In the special figure 1 game processing, the input of the large winning opening switch 38a is monitored, the entire processing related to the special figure 1 variable display game is controlled, and the special figure 1 (identification information that is variablely displayed in the special figure 1 variable display game) is displayed. Set up. In the special figure 1 game processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 is in the big hit or the small hit (the big hit game state or the small hit game state according to the result of the special figure 2 variable display game) (step A1). .. When the big hit or the small hit of the special figure 2 is not in progress (step A1; N), the big winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) is performed. In this large winning opening switch monitoring process, a process of monitoring the detection of a game ball by the large winning opening switch 38a provided in the special variable winning device 38 is performed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the big hit or the small hit of the special figure 2 is in progress (step A1; Y) and the big winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) is completed, the process proceeds to step A3. Special figure 1 If the game processing timer is not "0", "-1" is updated (step A3). The minimum value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is "0" (step A4). When the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is "0" (step A4; Y), that is, when the time is up or has already been up, in order to branch to the processing corresponding to the special figure 1 game processing number. The special figure 1 game sequence branch table referred to in the above is set in the register (step A5), and the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 1 game process number is acquired using the table (step A6). Then, a subroutine call is made according to the special figure 1 game processing number (step A7).

In step A7, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "0", the fluctuation start of the special figure 1 variable display game is monitored, and the variable start setting and effect setting of the special figure 1 variable display game, and the special figure 1 variable display game are set. Fig. 1 Setting information necessary for performing processing during fluctuations. Fig. 1 Performing normal processing (step A8).

In step A7, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "1", the special figure for setting the stop display time of the special figure 1 and the information necessary for performing the processing during the display of the special figure 1 are performed. 1 Perform the variable processing (step A9).

In step A7, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "2", if the game result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit, the fanfare command is set according to the type of big hit, and the big hit of each big hit. The special figure 1 display processing (step A10) for setting the fanfare time according to the winning opening opening pattern, setting the information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval processing, and the like is performed.

In step A7, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "3", the opening time of the big winning opening is set, the number of opening times is updated, and the information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the big winning opening is set. Perform fanfare / inter-interval processing (step A11).

In step A7, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "4", the process of setting the interval command if the jackpot round is not the final round, while setting the ending command if it is the final round, or the big winning opening Performs the large winning opening opening processing (step A12), which performs processing such as setting information necessary for performing the remaining ball processing.

In step A7, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "5", if the jackpot round is not the final round, the information necessary for performing fanfare / interval processing is set while the final round is used. For example, the process of setting the time for the remaining balls in the large winning opening to be discharged, and the processing of the remaining balls of the large winning opening (step A13) for setting the information necessary for performing the special figure 1 big hit end processing. Do it.

In step A7, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "6", the special figure 1 jackpot end process (step A14) for setting the information necessary for performing the special figure 1 normal processing is performed.

In step A7, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "7", the opening time / opening pattern of the predetermined large winning opening when a small hit occurs, the fanfare command is set, and the small hit medium processing is performed. Perform the small hit fanfare intermediate process (step A15) to set the information necessary for the operation.

In step A7, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "8", the setting of the command for the small hit middle operation transition process, the small hit end screen, the setting of the information necessary for performing the small hit remaining ball processing, etc. Perform the small hit medium processing (step A16).

In step A7, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "9", the small hit remaining ball processing (step A17) for setting the information necessary for performing the special figure 1 small hit end processing is performed.

In step A7, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "10", the special figure 1 small hit end process (step A18) for setting the information necessary for performing the special figure 1 normal processing is performed.

After that, after preparing a table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 (step A19), the symbol fluctuation control process (step A20) related to the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 is performed, and the special symbol game process is performed. To finish. On the other hand, in step A4, if the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is not "0" (step A4; N), that is, if the time is not up, the process proceeds to step A19, and the subsequent processing is performed. To do.

The small hit is a result mode that does not involve the operation of the condition device, and the big hit is a special result that involves the operation of the condition device. The condition device operates when a big hit occurs (stop display of the big hit symbol) in the special figure fluctuation display game, and when the condition device operates, for example, a big hit state occurs and it is special as a special electric accessory. It means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable winning device 38 is set (the accessory continuous operating device is activated). The fact that the condition device does not operate means that the above-mentioned flag is not set as in the case where the small hit lottery is won, for example. The "conditional device" may be a software means such as a flag that is turned on / off by software as described above, or a hardware means such as a switch that is turned on / off electrically. Further, "conditional device" is a term generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of an electric accessory, and the same applies to this specification. It is used as a term that has a meaning.

[Special Figure 2 Game Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 game processing (step S73b) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to FIG. 23. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure 2 game processing of the first embodiment.

In the special figure 2 game processing, the input of the large winning opening switch 38a is monitored, the entire processing related to the special figure 2 variable display game is controlled, and the special figure 2 (identification information that is variablely displayed in the special figure 2 variable display game) is displayed. Set up. In the special figure 2 game processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 is in the big hit or the small hit (the big hit game state or the small hit game state according to the result of the special figure 1 variable display game) (step A31). .. When the big hit or the small hit of the special figure 1 is not in progress (step A31; N), the big winning opening switch monitoring process (step A32) is performed. In this large winning opening switch monitoring process, a process of monitoring the detection of a game ball by the large winning opening switch 38a provided in the special variable winning device 38 is performed.

Next, when it is determined that the big hit or the small hit of the special figure 1 is in progress (step A31; Y), and when the big winning opening switch monitoring process (step A32) is completed, the process proceeds to step A33. , Special figure 2 If the game processing timer is not "0", "-1" is updated (step A33). The minimum value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is “0” (step A34). When the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is "0" (step A34; Y), that is, when the time is up or the time is already up, the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is "0". It is determined whether or not there is (step A35). When the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not "0" (step A35; N), the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by "-1" (step A36), and special figure 2 in RWM. A timer value for length variation (for example, 60,000 msec) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area, which is an area for storing the value of the game processing timer (step A37), and the process proceeds to step A59.

On the other hand, when the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is "0" (step A35; Y), the special figure 2 game sequence branch referred to for branching to the processing corresponding to the special figure 2 game processing number. A table is set in a register (step A38), and the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 2 game process number is acquired using the table (step A39). Then, a subroutine call is made according to the special figure 2 game processing number (step A47).

In step A47, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "0", the fluctuation start of the special figure 2 variable display game is monitored, and the variable start setting and effect setting of the special figure 2 variable display game, and the special figure 2 variable display game are set. Fig. 2 Setting information necessary for performing processing during fluctuations. Fig. 2 Performing normal processing (step A48).

In step A47, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "1", the special figure 2 sets the stop display time, sets the information necessary for performing the special figure 2 display processing, and the like. 2 Perform the variable processing (step A49).

In step A47, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "2", if the game result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit, the fanfare command is set according to the type of big hit, and the big hit of each big hit. The special figure 2 display processing (step A50) for setting the fanfare time according to the winning opening opening pattern, setting the information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval processing, and the like is performed.

In step A47, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "3", the opening time of the big winning opening is set, the number of opening times is updated, and the information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the big winning opening is set. Perform fanfare / inter-interval processing (step A51).

In step A47, when the special figure game processing number is "4", the process of setting the interval command if the jackpot round is not the final round, while setting the ending command if it is the final round, or the remaining big winning opening. Performs the large winning opening opening processing (step A52), which performs processing such as setting information necessary for performing ball processing.

In step A47, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "5", if the jackpot round is not the final round, the information necessary for performing fanfare / interval processing is set while the final round is used. For example, the process of setting the time for the remaining balls in the large winning opening to be discharged, and the processing of the remaining balls of the large winning opening (step A53) for setting the information necessary for performing the special figure 2 big hit end processing. Do it.

In step A47, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "6", the special figure 2 jackpot end process (step A54) for setting the information necessary for performing the special figure 2 normal processing is performed.

In step A47, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "7", the opening time / opening pattern of the predetermined large winning opening when a small hit occurs, the fanfare command is set, and the small hit medium processing is performed. Perform the small hit fanfare intermediate process (step A55) to set the information necessary for the operation.

In step A47, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "8", the setting of the command for the small hit middle operation transition process, the small hit end screen, the setting of the information necessary for performing the small hit remaining ball processing, etc. Perform the small hit medium processing (step A56).

In step A47, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "9", the small hit remaining ball processing (step A57) for setting the information necessary for performing the special figure 2 small hit end processing is performed.

In step A47, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "10", the special figure 2 small hit end process (step A58) for setting the information necessary for performing the special figure 2 normal processing is performed.

After that, after preparing a table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 (step A59), the symbol fluctuation control process (step A60) related to the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 is performed, and the special symbol game process is performed. To finish. On the other hand, in step A34, when the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not "0" (step A34; N), that is, when the time is not up or when the processing of step A37 is completed, step A59 Move to processing and perform subsequent processing.

[Special figure 1 Normal processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 normal processing (step A8) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game processing will be described with reference to FIG. 24. FIG. 24 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure 1 normal processing of the first embodiment.

In the special figure 1 normal processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 can start the fluctuation (that is, whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display game can be started) (step A251). In this determination, the game state is the period from the end of the fluctuation of the hit (big hit or small hit) of the special figure 2 (start of the process during display of the special figure 2) to the end of the hit operation (big hit game state or small hit game state). In the case of the above state, that is, when the special figure 2 is hit, it is determined that the special figure 1 cannot start the fluctuation, and when it is not in the above period, the special figure 1 is determined to be able to start the fluctuation.

Then, when it is determined that the special figure 1 can start the fluctuation (step A251; Y), whether or not the left-handed instruction has been notified (that is, the left-handed instruction notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and then the right-handed instruction is given. It is determined (whether or not the notification command has not been transmitted) (step A252). In step A252, if the left-handed instruction notification flag is set, it is determined that the left-handed instruction notification has been completed, and if the left-handed instruction notification flag is not set, it is determined that the left-handed instruction notification has not been completed. It may be configured.

If the left-handed instruction notification has not been notified (step A252; N), the left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A253), the effect command setting process (step A254) is performed, and the left-handed instruction notification flag is set (step). A255).

When the left-handed instruction has been notified (step A252; Y) and when step A255 is completed, the process proceeds to step A256, and whether the special figure 1 hold number (first start memory number) is "0". Whether or not it is determined (step A256). Then, when it is determined that the number of reserved special figures 1 is not "0" (step A256; N), a fluctuation start probability information command corresponding to the probability state of the current special figure fluctuation display game is prepared (step A257), and an effect command is created. The setting process (step A258) is performed, the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step A259) is performed, the decorative special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number is prepared (step A260), and the effect command setting process (step A260) is performed. Perform A261) and set (add information) the information indicating that the special figure 1 is changing (the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed) in the special figure status area in the RWM (step A262), and the probability of the special figure change display game. It is determined whether or not the state is in high probability (step A263).

In the special figure status area, information indicating that the special figure 1 is changing (the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed) and the information indicating that the special figure 2 is changing (the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed) are provided. Each area is stored independently, and the state indicated by the information set in this special figure status area is the special figure status. When step A262 is executed, the special figure status becomes one of "special figure 1 changing" and "special figure 1 changing + special figure 2 changing".

Further, in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step A259), a process of saving "1", which is a process number related to the special figure 1 changing process, in the special figure 1 game process number area (steps A318 and A319 described later). A process of saving the changing flag in the fluctuation control flag area of the special figure 1 (step A322 described later), a process of setting the fluctuation time as the value of the game processing timer of the special figure 1 (steps A307 and A497 described later), and the like are performed. ..

Then, when it is not in the high probability (step A263; N), it is determined whether or not it is in the high probability final fluctuation (step A264), and when it is not in the high probability final fluctuation (step A264; N), it is special. FIG. 1 The fluctuation check flag is set (step A265). It should be noted that the determination as to whether or not the high-probability final fluctuation is in progress is performed by the high-probability final fluctuation flag described later. That is, if the high-probability final fluctuation flag is set, it is determined that the high-probability final fluctuation is in progress.

Then, when step A265 is completed, when it is determined that the probability is high (step A263; Y), and when it is determined that the final fluctuation is high probability (step A264; Y), the special figure 1 Process during fluctuation The transition setting process (step A266) is performed, and the special figure 1 normal process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 cannot start fluctuation (step A251; N) and when the special figure 1 hold number is "0" in step A256 (step A256; Y), the processing numbers are set. “0” is set (step A267), the processing number, that is, “0” is saved in the special drawing 1 game processing number area, which is an area for storing the special drawing 1 game processing number in the RWM (step A268), and the special drawing 1 game processing number is stored. 1 Normally end the process.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the determination result in step A251 is positive and the number of reserved special figures 1 is not "0", the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step A259) and the like are executed. , Even if the special figure 2 is changing (the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed), the special figure 1 variable display game is started. That is, when the game control device 100 has the first start memory in the first start storage means (game control device 100), the variation display game based on the first start memory is displayed as a variation based on the second start memory. It is a control means that can be executed at the same time as the game.

[Special figure 2 Normal processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 normal processing (step A48) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 game processing will be described with reference to FIG. 25. FIG. 25 is a diagram showing a flowchart of special FIG. 2 normal processing of the first embodiment.

In the special figure 2 normal processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 can start the fluctuation (that is, whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation display game can be started) (step A271). In this determination, the game state is the period from the end of the fluctuation of the hit (big hit or small hit) of the special figure 1 (the start of the process during display of the special figure 1) to the end of the hit operation (the big hit game state or the small hit game state). In the case of the above state, that is, when the special figure 1 is hit, it is determined that the special figure 2 cannot start the fluctuation, and when it is not in the above period, the special figure 2 is determined to be able to start the fluctuation.

Then, when it is determined that the special figure 2 can start the fluctuation (step A271; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 hold number (second start storage number) is “0” (step A272). .. Then, when it is determined that the number of reserved special figures 2 is not "0" (step A272; N), a fluctuation start probability information command corresponding to the probability state of the current special figure fluctuation display game is prepared (step A273), and an effect command is created. The setting process (step A274) is performed, the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A275) is performed, and the information indicating that the special figure 2 is changing (the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is being executed) is set in the special figure status area in the RWM. (Information addition) (step A276), and it is determined whether or not the probability state of the special figure variation display game is high probability (step A277).

Here, the states indicated by the information set in the special figure status area (that is, the special figure status) are "special figure 2 changing" and "special figure 1 changing + special figure 2 changing" when step A276 is executed. It becomes one of the states.

Further, in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A275), a process of saving "1", which is a process number related to the special figure 2 changing process, in the special figure 2 game process number area (steps A348 and A349 described later). A process of saving the changing flag in the fluctuation control flag area of the special figure 2 (step A352 described later), a process of setting the fluctuation time as the value of the game processing timer of the special figure 2 (steps A337 and A497 described later), and the like are performed. ..

Note that, for example, after step A275 is executed, a decorative special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number is prepared, then an effect command setting process is executed, and then the process proceeds to step A276 (that is, special figure 2). Also, in the usual processing, the decoration special figure hold number command may be transmitted to the effect control device 300).

Then, when it is not in the high probability (step A277; N), it is determined whether or not it is in the high probability final fluctuation (step A278), and when it is not in the high probability final fluctuation (step A278; N), it is special. FIG. 2 The fluctuation check flag is set (step A279).

Then, when step A279 is completed, when it is determined that the probability is high (step A277; Y), and when it is determined that the final fluctuation is high probability (step A278; Y), the special figure 2 Process during fluctuation The transition setting process (step A280) is performed, and the special figure 2 normal process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the special figure 2 hold number is "0" (step A272; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 hold number is "0" (step A281), and the special figure 1 hold number is If it is determined that it is "0" (step A281; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 is changing (the special figure 1 variation display game is being executed) (step A282). Then, when the special figure 1 is not changing (step A282; N), it is determined whether or not the customer waiting demo has started (step A283), and when the customer waiting demo has not started (step A283; N). ) Sets the customer waiting demo flag area in the customer waiting demo flag area (step A284). Subsequently, a customer waiting demo command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step A285), and the effect command setting process (step A286) is performed. When the effect command setting process is performed, the prepared command (here, the customer waiting demo command) is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

Then, when step A286 is completed, when it is determined that the special figure 2 cannot start fluctuation (step A271; N), and when the special figure 1 hold number is not "0" (step A281; N), the special figure 1 is special. When FIG. 1 is changing (step A282; Y) and when the customer waiting demo has been started (step A283; Y), "0" is set as the processing number (step A287), and the RWM The processing number, that is, "0" is saved in the special drawing 2 game processing number area, which is an area for storing the special drawing 2 game processing number (step A288), and the special drawing 2 normal processing is ended.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the determination result of step A271 is affirmative and the number of reserved special figures 2 is not "0", the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A275) or the like is executed. , Even if the special figure 1 is changing (the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed), the special figure 2 variable display game is started. That is, when the game control device 100 has a second start memory in the second start storage means (game control device 100), the variation display game based on the second start memory is displayed as a variation based on the first start memory. It is a control means that can be executed at the same time as the game.

[Special Figure 1 Fluctuation Start Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (step A259) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 normal processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 26 and 27. FIG. 26 is a diagram (No. 1) showing a flowchart of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing of the first embodiment. FIG. 27 is a diagram (No. 2) showing a flowchart of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing of the first embodiment.

The special figure 1 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the first special figure variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game). In the special figure 1 fluctuation start process, first, the special figure 1 information setting flag indicating the type of the special figure change display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) is set (step A301), and the first special figure change display game is started. The jackpot flag 1 setting process (step A302) for setting the missed information and the jackpot information in the jackpot flag 1 for determining whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot is performed.

Next, after performing the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A303) related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure 1 information which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1. This is a table in which information for referring to various information related to the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the first special figure variation display game is set by performing the special figure 1 information setting process (step A304). Prepare the setting information table (step A305). After that, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process (step A306) for setting the fluctuation pattern which is the fluctuation mode in the first special figure fluctuation display game is performed, and the fluctuation start information setting for setting the fluctuation start information of the special figure fluctuation display game is performed. The process (step A307) is performed to determine whether or not the probability state of the special figure variation display game is high probability (step A308).

Then, when it is not in the high probability (step A308; N), it is determined whether or not it is in the high probability final fluctuation (step A309), and when it is not in the high probability final fluctuation (step A309; N), it is special. It is determined whether or not FIG. 2 is changing (special figure 2 changing display game is being executed) (step A310). When the special figure 2 is changing (step A310; Y), it is determined whether or not the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is “0” (step A311). When the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not "0" (step A311; N), it is determined whether the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is, for example, "4" or more (step A312). FIG. 2 When the number of repetitions of the game processing timer is not, for example, “4” or more (step A312; N), the remaining fluctuation time of special figure 2 is calculated (step A313).

The number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is set in the fluctuation start information setting process of step A337 described later when the special figure 2 game processing timer is in a state of a time value (for example, 60,000 msec) sufficient within the 2-byte range. It is set to "0" (see, for example, step A500 below).

Further, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 (execution time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game) can be calculated from the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer (value of the special figure 2 game processing timer area). Specifically, in step A313, the result of multiplying the length variation timer value (for example, 60,000 msec) saved in step A37 by the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is multiplied by the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer at that time. By adding the values in the timer area, the remaining fluctuation time in FIG. 2 can be calculated.

Further, when the timer value for long fluctuation is, for example, 60,000 msec (= 60 seconds), the value of the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 4 or more, which means that the remaining fluctuation time of special figure 2 is 240. It is more than a second (= 4 × 60 seconds), which is longer than the maximum fluctuation time of the special figure 1. In that case, it is not necessary to execute steps A315 and A316 described later, so a step to determine it. A312 is provided. Therefore, the numerical value "4" in step A312 is a numerical value for predetermining whether or not the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 is longer than the maximum fluctuation time of the special figure 1 by the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer. It's just one example.

Next, when step A313 is completed and when the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is "0" (step A311; Y), the process proceeds to step A314, and special figure 1 to be started from now on. When the fluctuation time of (for example, the fluctuation time set in step A306) is the remaining fluctuation time of special figure 2 currently changing (calculation result of step A313 or the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is zero). Special figure 2 It is determined whether or not the time is shorter than the time determined by the value of the game processing timer (step A314).

Then, when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is not shorter than the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 (step A314; N), a command for notifying that the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is longer is prepared (step A315). ), The effect command setting process (step A316) is performed.

Next, when the probability is high (step A308; Y), the high probability final fluctuation is in progress (step A309; Y), and the special figure 2 is not changing (step A310; N), the special figure 2 game. When the number of repetitions of the processing timer is, for example, "4" or more (step A312; Y), when the fluctuation time of special figure 1 is shorter than the remaining fluctuation time of special figure 2 (step A314; Y), and step A316. When is completed, the process proceeds to step A317 (FIG. 27).

When the process proceeds to step A317, the high probability fluctuation number update process (step A317) is performed, "1" is set as the process number (step A318), and the special figure 1 game process number is stored in the RWM. The processing number, that is, "1" is saved in the game processing number area (step A319), and the customer waiting demo flag area, which is an area for setting the customer waiting demo flag area in the RWM, is cleared (step A320). After that, the signal related to the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation (the signal during the change of the special symbol 1 is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A321), and the changing flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area of the RWM (step A321). Step A322), save the initial value (for example, 100 ms) of the blinking control timer (timer of the blinking cycle of the symbol display unit 53 of the special figure 1) in the special figure 1 blinking control timer area of the RWM (step A323), and specialize the RWM. FIG. 1 The initial value (for example, “0” corresponding to a blank symbol) is saved in the symbol number area during fluctuation (step A324), and the special figure 1 variation start process is terminated. The reason why "0" is saved in the symbol number area during the change of the special figure 1 in step A324 is to start the change display of the special figure 1 from the blank symbol.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (step A275) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 normal processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 28 and 29. FIG. 28 is a diagram (No. 1) showing a flowchart of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing of the first embodiment. FIG. 29 is a diagram (No. 2) showing a flowchart of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing of the first embodiment.

The special figure 2 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the second special figure variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game). In the special figure 2 fluctuation start process, first, the special figure 2 information setting flag indicating the type of the special figure change display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) is set (step A331), and the second special figure change display game is set. The jackpot flag 2 setting process (step A332) for setting the missed information and the jackpot information in the jackpot flag 2 for determining whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot is performed.

Next, after performing the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A333) related to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure 2 information which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2. The special figure 2 variation pattern is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the variation pattern of the second special figure variation display game is set by performing the special figure 2 information setting process (step A334). The setting information table is prepared (step A335). After that, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process (step A336) for setting the fluctuation pattern which is the fluctuation mode in the second special figure fluctuation display game is performed, and the fluctuation start information setting for setting the fluctuation start information of the special figure fluctuation display game is performed. The process (step A337) is performed to determine whether or not the probability state of the special figure variation display game is high probability (step A338).

Then, when it is not in the high probability (step A338; N), it is determined whether or not it is in the high probability final fluctuation (step A339), and when it is not in the high probability final fluctuation (step A339; N), it is special. It is determined whether or not FIG. 1 is changing (special figure 1 changing display game is being executed) (step A340). When the special figure 1 is changing (step A340; Y), the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is calculated (step A343). The remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 1 can be calculated from the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer (the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer area).

Next, when step A343 is completed, the process proceeds to step A344, and the fluctuation time of special figure 2 to be started from now on (for example, the fluctuation time set in step A336) of special figure 1 which is currently changing. It is determined whether or not it is shorter than the remaining fluctuation time (calculation result of step A343) (step A344).

Then, when the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 is not shorter than the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 1 (step A344; N), a command for notifying that the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 is longer is prepared (step A345). ), The effect command setting process (step A346) is performed.

Next, when the probability is high (step A338; Y), the high probability final fluctuation is in progress (step A339; Y), and the special figure 1 is not changing (step A340; N), the special figure 2 When the fluctuation time is shorter than the remaining fluctuation time of FIG. 1 (step A344; Y), and when step A346 is completed, the process proceeds to step A347 (FIG. 29).

When the process proceeds to step A347, the high probability fluctuation number update process (step A347) is performed, "1" is set as the process number (step A348), and the special figure 2 is an area for storing the special figure 2 game process number in the RWM. The processing number, that is, "1" is saved in the game processing number area (step A349), and the customer waiting demo flag area, which is an area for setting the customer waiting demo flag area in the RWM, is cleared (step A350). After that, the signal related to the start of the special figure 2 fluctuation (the signal during the change of the special symbol 2 is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A351), and the changing flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area of the RWM (step A351). Step A352), save the initial value (for example, 100 ms) of the blinking control timer (timer of the blinking cycle of the symbol display unit 54 of the special figure 2) in the special figure 2 blinking control timer area of the RWM (step A353), and specialize the RWM. FIG. 2 The initial value (for example, “0” corresponding to the blank symbol) is saved in the symbol number area during fluctuation (step A354), and the special FIG. 2 fluctuation start process is terminated. The reason why "0" is saved in the symbol number area during the change of the special figure 2 in step A354 is to start the change display of the special figure 2 from the blank symbol.

[Variation start information setting process]
Next, the details of the fluctuation start information setting processing (steps A307 and A337) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and special drawing 2 fluctuation start processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 and 31. FIG. 30 is a diagram (No. 1) showing a flowchart of the fluctuation start information setting process of the first embodiment. FIG. 31 is a diagram (No. 2) showing a flowchart of the fluctuation start information setting process of the first embodiment.

In the variation start information setting process, first, the information in the random number storage area of the target variation pattern random number 1, the variation pattern random number 2, and the variation pattern random number 3 is cleared. That is, it is determined whether or not the information of the special figure 1 is being set (step A491), and when the information of the special figure 1 is being set (step A491; Y), the fluctuation pattern random number 1 and the fluctuation pattern random number of the special figure 1 are being set. 2 and the information (for the holding ball 1) of the random number storage area (for the holding ball 1) of the variation pattern random number 3 are cleared (step A491a). When the information of the special figure 1 is not set (step A491; N), the information of the random number storage area of the variable pattern random number 1, the variable pattern random number 2, and the variable pattern random number 3 of the special figure 2 is cleared (step). A491b).

Next, the first half fluctuation time value table is set (step A492), and the first half fluctuation time value corresponding to the first half fluctuation number is acquired (step A493). Further, the latter half fluctuation time value table is set (step A494), and the latter half fluctuation time value corresponding to the latter half fluctuation number is acquired (step A495).

Then, the first half fluctuation time value and the second half fluctuation time value are added (step A496), and the special figure game processing timer area for the added value (that is, the special figure 1 game processing timer area during the information setting of the special figure 1). While the information of the special figure 2 is being set, it is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area) (step A497).

Next, it is determined whether or not the information of the special figure 1 is being set (step A498), and when the information of the special figure 1 is not being set (step A498; N), it is determined whether or not the long variation of the special figure 2 is started (step). A499), if it is not the start of the long fluctuation of the special figure 2 (step A499; N), the "repeated number of times of the special figure 2 game processing timer is stored in the RWM)" Save "0" (step A500).

On the other hand, when the long fluctuation start of the special figure 2 (step A499; Y), "9" is saved in the repetition number area of the special figure 2 game processing timer (step A501). Then, when the information of the special figure 1 is being set (step A498; Y), when the processes of steps A500 and A501 are completed, the process proceeds to step A502.

It should be noted that the number of repetitions (the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer) is set for the long variation of the special figure 2 in order to change the time that is insufficient for the 2-byte special figure game processing timer. Further, as a result of the addition in step A496, for example, when 60000 ms is set in the special figure 2 game processing timer area in step A497 and "9" is saved as the number of repetitions in step A501, the timer interrupt processing (step A33 described above) The value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is subtracted, and when the time is up, the number of repetitions of the special figure game processing timer is subtracted by 1 in the above-mentioned step A36, and further, in the above-mentioned step A37, the special figure 2 game processing timer area is set. 60,000 ms is set. Therefore, in this case, as a result, the total variation time of FIG. 2 is 60,000 ms × 10 in this embodiment, which is a variation time of 10 minutes. Actually, since it is a timer interrupt of 4 ms, it can be set up to about 262 seconds with 2 bytes, but for ease of understanding, the case where it can be expressed by multiplication of 60 seconds is described as an example.

Next, when the process proceeds to step A502, the variation command data (MODE) corresponding to the first half variation number is prepared (step A502), and the variation command data (ACTION) corresponding to the second half variation number is prepared (step A503). ), Perform the effect command setting process (step A504).

Although detailed description is omitted, in the effect command setting process, the prepared command data (MODE and ACTION) are written to the effect serial transmission buffer unless the effect serial transmission buffer is full. As a result, the effect command consisting of the prepared command data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 by serial communication using the serial communication function of the CPU 111A in the game control device 100. The same applies when the effect command setting process is executed by being called in another step. Further, in the case of this flowchart, the command is transmitted in a 2-byte configuration such as "MODE" and "ACTION" like the effect command, but a byte configuration of more than that may be used. In those cases, a flowchart corresponding to a multi-byte configuration may be used.

Next, when step A504 is completed, it is determined whether or not the information of special figure 1 is being set (step A505), and if the information of special figure 1 is being set (step A505; Y), the number of reserved special figures 1 is set. Is updated by "-1" (step A506), the address of the random number storage area of Special Figure 1 is set, the random number storage area of the address is shifted (step A507), and the information of the free area after the shift is cleared. (Step A508), the variation start information setting process is completed.

On the other hand, when the information of the special figure 1 is not being set (step A505; N), the number of holdings of the special figure 2 is updated by "-1" (step A506a), and the address of the random number storage area of the special figure 2 is set. The random number storage area of the address is shifted (step A507a), the information of the free area after the shift is cleared (step A508a), and the fluctuation start information setting process is completed.

By the above processing, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a determination means for determining various random value values stored in the start storage means (RAM 111C). Further, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern determining means capable of determining the variation pattern of the identification information executed in the variation display game based on the determination information of the start memory.

Then, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is transmitted to the effect control device 300 by the effect command setting process described above, and the effect control device 300 receives the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game. The detailed production contents in the decoration special figure fluctuation display game are set according to the determined fluctuation pattern, and the decoration special figure fluctuation display game is executed. Information on the start of these special figure variation display games includes a decorative special figure hold number command including information on the number of start memories (holds), a decorative special figure command including information on a stop symbol, and a variation of the special figure variation display game. Examples include variable commands containing information about patterns (sometimes referred to as variable pattern commands), and for example, each effect command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 in a predetermined order as shown in the flowchart of the present embodiment. ..

[High probability fluctuation frequency update process]
Next, the details of the high-probability fluctuation number update processing (steps A317 and A347) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and the special drawing 2 fluctuation start processing will be described with reference to FIG. 32. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the high probability fluctuation number update process of the first embodiment.

In the high probability fluctuation number update process, first, it is determined whether or not the probability state of the special figure fluctuation display game is in high probability (step A551), and if it is not in special figure high probability (step A551; N), , Ends the high probability fluctuation count update process.

When one of the types of the special figure variation display game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is in the big hit game state, the hit probability of the other variable display game is always controlled to a low probability, but one is small. In the case of a hit, the other may be in high probability.

When the probability is high (step A551; Y), the number of high-probability fluctuations that manages the number of executions of the special figure fluctuation display game in the high-probability state is updated by "-1" (step A552), and the high-probability fluctuation is performed. It is determined whether or not the number of times is "0" (step A553).

If the number of high-probability fluctuations is not "0" (step A553; N), the high-probability fluctuation number update process is terminated. When the number of high-probability fluctuations is "0" (step A553; Y), the signal relating to the high-probability end is saved in the external information output data area (step A555). The signal relating to the high probability end is a signal that turns off the big hit 2 signal.

Then, the signal relating to the end of the high probability & time reduction (high probability & no time reduction, or high probability & time reduction) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A556). The signals related to the end of high probability & time saving are the signal for turning off the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, the signal for turning off the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, and the signal for turning off the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal. A signal to turn off the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortening state signal, and a signal to turn off the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal are included. Further, even in the high probability of the special figure, since only the probability state changes in the normal figure, the normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal and the normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal are always turned off.

Then, the low probability number is saved in the game state display number area (step A557), the special figure low probability & no time reduction flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step A559), and the symbol that starts to fluctuate (special figure). The high-probability final fluctuation flag corresponding to FIG. 1 or special figure 2) is set (step A560), and the high-probability fluctuation number update process is completed.

The high-probability final fluctuation flag includes information capable of determining the type (special figure 1 or special figure 2) of the special figure fluctuation display game which is the high-probability final fluctuation. In addition, in the high-probability final fluctuation, the internal probability becomes low at the start of the fluctuation, so even if the fluctuation is low now, the information to show that the fluctuation started during the high probability is this high. Probability final fluctuation flag. As described above, in the case of the present embodiment, in the high-probability final variation, the probability state (set state in the game control device 100) of the target special figure is returned to the low probability at the start of the variation. As a result, when the game ball wins the start opening during the final round of special figure fluctuation in the high probability state, it is possible to prevent a problem that the hit determination for the start winning is determined with high probability.

[Special Figure 1 Processing during fluctuation]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 changing process (step A9) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 and 34. FIG. 33 is a diagram (No. 1) showing a flowchart of the special drawing 1 changing process of the first embodiment. FIG. 34 is a diagram (No. 2) showing a flowchart of the special drawing 1 changing process of the first embodiment.

In the special figure 1 changing process, first, the number of times the symbol is confirmed is updated by "+1" (step A571), and a command from the decorative special figure 1 command area (decorative special figure 1 including information on the stop symbol for special figure 1) is performed. The command) is loaded, prepared (step A572), and the effect command setting process (step A573) is performed.

Next, the decorative special figure 1 stop command (design stop command for special figure 1) is prepared (step A574), the effect command setting process (step A575) is performed, and the high probability final is determined by the state of the high probability final fluctuation flag. It is determined whether or not it is fluctuating (step A576). If it is not a high-probability final variation (step A576; N), the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern saved in the stop symbol pattern area in the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process is set to the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern in this special figure 1 variation display game. If it is set as the stop display time of (step A577) and has a high probability final fluctuation (step A576; Y), the display time at the time of the high probability final fluctuation is set as the stop display time of this special figure 1 fluctuation display game. The setting (step A578) is performed, and the process proceeds to step A579. Here, the stop display time set in steps A577 and A578 is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area, for example, in a step (not shown) provided immediately before step A579.

To give an example of the display time of the special figure 1, in the case of the first embodiment, if the stop symbol pattern is an out-of-order symbol pattern, 600 ms is set as the display time, and the stop symbol pattern is a jackpot symbol pattern. In some cases, the display time is set to 2000 ms, and when the stop symbol pattern is a small hit symbol pattern, the display time is set to 136 ms. Further, the display time of the high-probability final fluctuation is set to 7000 ms.

Next, when the process proceeds to step A579 (FIG. 34), it is determined whether or not the current (currently running) special figure 1 variable display game is out of order based on the information determined and set by the jackpot flag 1 setting process. (Step A579), if it is out of alignment (step A579; Y), the process proceeds to step A594, and if it is not out of alignment (step A579; N), special figure 2 is currently changing (special figure 2 variation display game is being executed). It is determined whether or not there is (step A580).

It should be noted that the determination as to whether or not the special figure 2 is changing shall be made based on any of the information in the special figure 2 game processing number area, the information in the special figure status area, and the information in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area. Can be done. That is, if "1" is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area, it may be determined that it is changing, or if the special figure 2 changing is set in the special figure status area, it is determined that it is changing. It may be configured, or it may be determined that it is changing if the changing flag is saved in the fluctuation control flag area of FIG. 2, or it may be determined by a combination of these conditions.

Then, when the special figure 2 is also changing (step A580; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 display process is being executed (step A581), and the special figure 2 display process is not being executed. In the case (step A581; N), the number of times the symbol is confirmed is updated by "+1" (step A582).

Next, when step A582 is completed and when the process during display of special figure 2 is being executed (step A581; Y), the display time of this special figure 1 (time set in step A577 or the like) is set. For example, the result of adding 4 ms is set as the display time of the special figure 2 (step A583), and the display time of the special figure 2 is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step A584). By the processing of steps A583 and A584, if the special figure 2 has already started the stop display, the display time of the special figure 2 is reset. By this resetting, the display time of the special figure 2 is basically extended, but in some cases, it may be shortened.

After that, a command (decorative special figure 2 command including information on the stop symbol for special figure 2) is loaded from the decorative special figure 2 command area, prepared (step A585), and the effect command setting process (step A586) is performed. Next, the decorative special figure 2 stop command (design stop command for special figure 2) is prepared (step A587), the effect command setting process (step A588) is performed, and the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2 (step). Perform A589).

According to the processing of steps A579 to A589 described above, if the current special figure 1 variable display game for stopping and displaying the decorative symbol is a hit (big hit or small hit), the special figure that is changing at the same time. The fluctuation display of 2 will be forcibly terminated.

Next, when step A589 is completed and when special figure 2 is not changing (step A580; N), a command is loaded from the decorative special figure 1 command area and saved in the hit symbol command area (step A590). , It is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game of this time is a small hit (step A591).

Then, in the case of a big hit and not a small hit (step A591; N), information (number of special figure 1 rounds) is obtained from the special figure 1 round number upper limit value information area in order to control the big hit game after the special figure 1 fluctuation ends. Load the special figure 1 round number upper limit value information) that determines the upper limit value, save it in the round number upper limit value information area (step A592), load the information from the special figure 1 big winning opening opening information area, and open the big winning opening. Save in the information area (step A593).

Next, when the current special figure 1 variable display game is out of order (step A579; Y), and when the current special figure 1 variable display game is a small hit (step A591; Y), step A593 is completed. If so, the process proceeds to step A594. When the process proceeds to step A594, the information (stop symbol number) is loaded from the special figure 1 stop symbol save area, saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (step A594), and the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1 (step). A595) is performed to end the special figure 1 changing process. In the special figure 1 stop symbol save area, a predetermined stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process.

In this way, the game control device 100 serves as a stop time setting means for setting a stop time for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game. Further, when the variable display game based on the first start memory has a special result (hit), the game control device 100 serves as a means for ending the variable display game based on the second start memory being executed at the same time.

[Special Figure 2 Processing during fluctuation]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 changing process (step A49) in the special figure 2 game process described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 and 36. FIG. 35 is a diagram (No. 1) showing a flowchart of special FIG. 2 processing during fluctuation of the first embodiment. FIG. 36 is a diagram (No. 2) showing a flowchart of the special drawing 2 changing process of the first embodiment.

In the special figure 2 changing process, first, the number of times the symbol is confirmed is updated by "+1" (step A601), and then a command from the decorative special figure 2 command area (decorative special figure 2 including information on the stop symbol for special figure 2) is performed. The command) is loaded, prepared (step A602), and the effect command setting process (step A603) is performed.

Next, the decorative special figure 2 stop command (design stop command for special figure 2) is prepared (step A604), the effect command setting process (step A605) is performed, and the high probability final is determined by the state of the high probability final fluctuation flag. It is determined whether or not it is fluctuating (step A606). If it is not a high-probability final variation (step A606; N), the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern saved in the stop symbol pattern area in the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is set to the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern in this special figure 2 variation display game. If it is set as the stop display time of (step A607) and has a high probability final fluctuation (step A606; Y), the display time at the time of the high probability final fluctuation is set as the stop display time of this special figure 2 fluctuation display game. The setting (step A608) is performed, and the process proceeds to step A609. Here, the stop display time set in steps A607 and A608 is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area, for example, in a step (not shown) provided immediately before step A609.

To give an example of the display time of the special figure 2, in the case of the first embodiment, if the stop symbol pattern is an out-of-order symbol pattern, 600 ms is set as the display time, and the stop symbol pattern is a jackpot symbol pattern. Even if there is, 600 ms is set as the display time, and 600 ms is set as the display time even when the stop symbol pattern is the small hit symbol pattern. Further, the display time of the high-probability final fluctuation is set to 7000 ms. In the case of the first embodiment, the stop symbol pattern is removed and the same display time is set for the big hit symbol pattern, the big hit symbol pattern, and the small hit symbol pattern, but different display times may be set for each.

Next, when the process proceeds to step A609 (FIG. 36), it is determined whether or not the current (currently running) special figure 2 variable display game is out of order based on the information determined and set by the jackpot flag 2 setting process. (Step A609), if it is out of alignment (step A609; Y), the process proceeds to step A624, and if it is not out of alignment (step A609; N), special figure 1 is currently changing (special figure 2 variation display game is being executed). It is determined whether or not there is (step A610).

It should be noted that the determination as to whether or not the special figure 1 is changing shall be made based on any of the information in the special figure 1 game processing number area, the information in the special figure status area, and the information in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area. Can be done. That is, if "1" is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area, it may be determined that the game is changing, or if the special figure 1 status area is set to change, it is determined that the game is changing. It may be configured, or it may be determined that it is changing if the changing flag is saved in the fluctuation control flag area of FIG. 1, or it may be determined by a combination of these conditions.

Then, when the special figure 1 is also changing (step A610; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 display process is being executed (step A611), and the special figure 1 display process is not being executed. In the case (step A611; N), the number of symbol confirmation output times is updated by "+1" (step A612).

Next, when step A612 is completed and when the process during display of special figure 1 is being executed (step A611; Y), the display time of special figure 2 this time (time set in step A607 or the like) is set. For example, the result of adding 4 ms is set as the display time of the special figure 1 (step A613), and the display time of the special figure 1 is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step A614). By the processing of steps A613 and A614, if the special figure 1 has already started the stop display, the display time of the special figure 1 is reset. By this resetting, the display time of the special figure 1 is basically extended, but in some cases, it may be shortened.

After that, a command (decorative special figure 1 command including information on the stop symbol for special figure 1) is loaded from the decorative special figure 1 command area, prepared (step A615), and the effect command setting process (step A616) is performed. Next, the decorative special figure 1 stop command (design stop command for special figure 1) is prepared (step A617), the effect command setting process (step A618) is performed, and the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2 (step). Perform A619).

According to the processing of steps A609 to A619 described above, if the current special figure 2 variable display game for stopping and displaying the decorative symbol is a hit (big hit or small hit), the special figure that is changing at the same time. The fluctuation display of 1 will be forcibly terminated.

Next, when step A619 is completed and when special figure 1 is not changing (step A610; N), a command is loaded from the decorative special figure 2 command area and saved in the hit symbol command area (step A620). , It is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game of this time is a small hit (step A621).

Then, in the case of a big hit and not a small hit (step A621; N), information (number of special figure 2 rounds) is obtained from the special figure 2 round number upper limit value information area in order to control the big hit game after the special figure 2 fluctuation ends. Load the special figure 2 round number upper limit value information) that determines the upper limit value, save it in the round number upper limit value information area (step A622), load the information from the special figure 2 big winning opening opening information area, and open the big winning opening. Save in the information area (step A623).

Next, when the special figure 2 variable display game this time is out of order (step A609; Y) and when the special figure 2 variable display game this time is a small hit (step A621; Y), step A623 is completed. If so, the process proceeds to step A624. When the process proceeds to step A624, the information (stop symbol number) is loaded from the special figure 2 stop symbol save area, saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (step A624), and the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1 (step). Perform A625) to end the special figure 2 changing process. In the special figure 2 stop symbol save area, a predetermined stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process.

In this way, the game control device 100 serves as a stop time setting means for setting a stop time for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game. Further, when the variable display game based on the second start memory has a special result (hit), the game control device 100 serves as a means for ending the variable display game based on the first start memory being executed at the same time.

[Special Figure 1 Displaying Process Transition Setting Process 1]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1 (step A595) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 changing process will be described with reference to FIG. 37. FIG. 37 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the process transition setting process 1 during display of the special figure 1 of the first embodiment.

In the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1, first, "2", which is the process number related to the special figure 1 display process, is set as the process number (step A631), and the process is set in the special figure 1 game process number area. Save the number or "2" (step A632).

Next, the signal relating to the end of the variation in Special Figure 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (step A633). The signal relating to the end of the special symbol 1 fluctuation is a signal for turning off the signal during the special symbol 1 fluctuation.

After that, as information for controlling the special figure 1 fluctuation display game in the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53, the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop in the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area ( Step A634), special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1 is terminated.

[Special Figure 2 Displaying Process Transition Setting Process 1]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1 (step A625) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 changing process will be described with reference to FIG. 38. FIG. 38 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the process transition setting process 1 during display of the special figure 2 of the first embodiment.

In the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1, first, "2", which is the process number related to the special figure 2 display process, is set as the process number (step A641), and the process is set in the special figure 2 game process number area. Save the number, i.e. "2" (step A642).

Next, the signal relating to the end of the fluctuation in FIG. 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (step A643). The signal relating to the end of the special symbol 2 fluctuation is a signal for turning off the signal during the special symbol 2 fluctuation.

After that, as information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54, the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop in the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area ( Step A644), special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1 is terminated.

[Special Figure 1 Displaying Process Transition Setting Process 2]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2 (step A619) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 changing process will be described with reference to FIG. 39. FIG. 39 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the process transition setting process 2 during display of the special figure 1 of the first embodiment. Note that this special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2 forcibly ends the special figure 1 variable display game that has been fluctuating at the same time when the special figure 2 variable display game that started the fluctuation is a hit. It is a process to make it. That is, it is a process for setting information when the other symbol is hit and the device is forcibly stopped.

In the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2, first, the process number “2” related to the special figure 1 display process is set as the process number (step A651), and the process is set in the special figure 1 game process number area. Save the number, i.e. "2" (step A652).

Next, the signal relating to the end of the variation in Special Figure 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (step A653). The signal relating to the end of the special symbol 1 fluctuation is a signal for turning off the signal during the special symbol 1 fluctuation.

After that, as information for controlling the special figure 1 fluctuation display game in the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53, the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop in the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area ( Step A654), the detached stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (area for storing the stop symbol pattern in the RWM) (step A655). In this stop symbol pattern area, for the special figure 1 variable display game being executed, usually, a predetermined stop symbol pattern (depending on the extracted random number, a hit stop symbol pattern) has already been set in the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process. (In some cases) is saved, but here, even if the saved stop symbol pattern is a hit, it is forcibly rewritten to the out-of-stop symbol pattern. Similarly, in steps A656 to 661 after this routine, even if there is data once set in the regular step, it is cleared or reset in order to forcibly terminate the data once it is out of order.

Next, the special figure 1 round number upper limit information area (area for storing the special figure 1 round number upper limit information in RWM) is cleared (step A656), and the special figure 1 large winning opening opening information area (special figure in RWM) is cleared. Clear (step A657) (step A657), and save the information that is out of the small hit flag 1 area (step A658). The deviation information is saved in the jackpot flag 1 area (step A659). Here, the small hit flag 1 area and the big hit flag 1 area are the small hit flag area and the big hit flag area for the special figure 1, and the information on whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is a small hit or whether or not it is a big hit. It is an area of RWM that stores each of the information, and the information is normally set in the jackpot flag 1 setting process, and the information is reset here.

Next, the special figure 1 stop symbol save area is cleared (step A660), the stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (step A661), and the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2 is terminated. ..

[Special Figure 2 Displaying Process Transition Setting Process 2]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2 (step A589) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 changing process will be described with reference to FIG. 40. FIG. 40 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the process transition setting process 2 during display of the special figure 2 of the first embodiment. In addition, when the special figure 1 variable display game that started the fluctuation is a hit, the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2 forcibly ends the special figure 2 variable display game that has been fluctuating at the same time. It is a process to make it. That is, it is a process for setting information when the other symbol is hit and the device is forcibly stopped.

In the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2, first, the process number “2” related to the special figure 2 display process is set as the process number (step A671), and the process is set in the special figure 2 game process number area. Save the number, i.e. "2" (step A672).

Next, the signal relating to the end of the fluctuation in FIG. 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (step A673). The signal relating to the end of the special symbol 2 fluctuation is a signal for turning off the signal during the special symbol 2 fluctuation.

After that, as information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54, the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop in the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area ( Step A674), the detached stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (area for storing the stop symbol pattern in the RWM) (step A675). In this stop symbol pattern area, for the special figure 2 variable display game being executed, usually, a predetermined stop symbol pattern (depending on the extracted random number, a hit stop symbol pattern) has already been set in the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process. (In some cases) is saved, but here, even if the saved stop symbol pattern is a hit, it is forcibly rewritten to the out-of-stop symbol pattern. Similarly, in steps A676 to 681 after this routine, even if there is data once set in the regular step, it is cleared or reset for forced termination at the outlier.

Next, the special figure 2 round number upper limit information area (area for storing the special figure 2 round number upper limit information in RWM) is cleared (step A676), and the special figure 2 large winning opening opening information area (special figure in RWM) is cleared. The area for storing the opening information of the two major winning openings) is cleared (step A677), and the information is saved in the small hit flag 2 area (step A678). The deviation information is saved in the jackpot flag 2 area (step A679). Here, the small hit flag 2 area and the big hit flag 2 area are the small hit flag area and the big hit flag area for the special figure 2, and the information on whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit or whether or not it is a big hit. It is an area of RWM that stores each of the information, and the information is normally set in the jackpot flag 2 setting process, and the information is reset here.

Next, the special figure 2 stop symbol save area is cleared (step A680), the stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (step A681), and the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2 is terminated. ..

[Processing during display of special figure 1]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 display process (step A10) in the special figure 1 game process described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 41, 42, and 43. FIG. 41 is a diagram (No. 1) showing a flowchart of the process during display of the special figure 1 of the first embodiment. FIG. 42 is a diagram (No. 2) showing a flowchart of the process during display of the special figure 1 of the first embodiment. FIG. 43 is a diagram (No. 3) showing a flowchart of the process during display of the special figure 1 of the first embodiment.

In the process of displaying the special figure 1, first, the small hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is loaded (step A701), and the information of the small hit flag 1 area of the RWM is displayed. Clear (step A702).

Next, the jackpot flag 1 set in the jackpot flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is loaded (step A703), and the information in the jackpot flag 1 area of the RWM is cleared (step A704). Then, it is determined whether or not the loaded jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot (step A705), and if it is determined to be a jackpot (step A705; Y), the jackpot of the first special figure variation display game (special figure 1) is determined. Save the signal related to the start of the jackpot) in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A706), prepare the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation release command (step A707), perform the effect command setting process (step A708), and perform the number of rounds. The upper limit table is set (step A709). In addition, the signal regarding the start of the special figure 1 big hit includes a signal for turning on the signal for operating the condition device, a signal for turning on the signal for operating the continuous operation device for the accessory, and a signal for turning on the signal for hitting the special symbol 1. include.

Next, after setting the round number upper limit value table (step A709), the round number upper limit value corresponding to the round number upper limit value information (in the case of the first embodiment, for example, "16" or "4", or the like, for example, (There may be "8" or "2") is acquired and saved in the RWM round number upper limit value area (step A710). Subsequently, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (step A711).

Next, the decorative special symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is loaded from the hit symbol command area of the RWM, prepared (step A712), and the effect command setting process (step A713) is performed. Subsequently, a fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process is prepared (step A714), and the effect command setting process (step A715) is performed. ..

Next, the large winning opening opening information and the signal corresponding to the state of the probability of winning in the normal figure fluctuation display game and the special figure fluctuation display game are saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step A716). In the case of the first embodiment, in step A716, two big hit signals and three big hit signals are saved as signals corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the state of probability. In addition, each on / off is determined by the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability. For example, the jackpot 2 signal is turned on if it is a jackpot other than 2R bumping, turned on if it is a 2R bumping jackpot with a high probability, and turned off if it is a 2R bumping jackpot with a low probability. Further, the jackpot 3 signal is turned on if it is a jackpot other than 2R collision, off if it is a 2R collision jackpot in high probability, and is turned on if it is a 2R collision jackpot in low probability.

After that, the jackpot fanfare time (for example, 5000 ms, 4700 ms, 7700 ms, or 300 ms) corresponding to the jackpot opening information is set (step A717), and the set jackpot fanfare time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step A717). Step A718).

The information in the large winning opening fraudulent winning number area is cleared (step A720), the fraud monitoring period out-of-period flag is saved in the large winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A721), and the process proceeds to step A724.

When moving to step A724, 3 is set as the processing number (step A724), the processing number, that is, "3" is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step A725), and the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing (step). Perform A726) and end the processing while the special figure 1 is being displayed.

On the other hand, in step A705, when the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (step A705; N), it is determined whether or not the loaded small hit flag 1 is a small hit (step A727), and the small hit flag 1 is small. When it is determined that it is a hit (step A727; Y), it is determined whether or not the final fluctuation with high probability is in progress (step A728).

Then, in step A728, when it is determined that the final fluctuation with high probability is in progress (step A728; Y), the probability of a hit result in the normal figure fluctuation display game and the special figure fluctuation display game is set to the normal probability state (step A728; Y). A probability information command related to the information to be set as (low probability state) is prepared (step A729), and the effect command setting process (step A730) is performed. Subsequently, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery to save the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (step A731), and the right-handed instruction notification flag is cleared (step). A732). In step A732, assuming a mode in which the right-handed instruction notification is performed in the high-probability state, the right-handed instruction notification flag is cleared because the high-probability final fluctuation is determined and the high-probability state is completed. Illustrate. However, when the present embodiment is a mode in which the right-handed instruction is not notified in the high-probability state, the left-handed instruction is notified in the deleted configuration in step A732 (or the left-handed instruction is notified in the high-probability state, and the left-handed instruction is notified in step A732. There may be a configuration in which the flag is cleared).

Next, when step A732 is completed and when the high probability final fluctuation is not in progress (step A728; N), a command is loaded from the hit symbol command area and prepared (step A733), and an effect command setting process (step) is performed. Perform A734). Subsequently, a small hit fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process is prepared (step A735), and the effect command setting process (step A736) is prepared. Is performed, and it is determined whether or not the game state is a predetermined state (for example, a state in which the fanfare support state, the big hit, or the special mode is not performed) in which the game state should be left-handed (step A737).

When it is determined in step A737 that the state should be left-handed (step A737; Y), the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step A738). The signal related to the left-handed instruction is, for example, a signal for turning off the launch position designation signal 1. Next, in order to turn off the right-handed display LED, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A739), and the process proceeds to step A743.

On the other hand, when it is not determined that the predetermined state should be left-handed (step A737; N), the signal related to the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step A740). The signal related to the right-handed instruction is, for example, a signal for turning on the launch position designation signal 1. Next, in order to turn on the right-handed display LED, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A741), and the process proceeds to step A743.

When the process proceeds to step A743, the information in the large winning opening fraudulent winning number area is cleared (step A743), the fraud monitoring period out-of-period flag is saved in the large winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A744), and the process proceeds to step A747. ..

When the process shifts to step A747, the special figure 1 small hit fanfare middle process transition setting process (step A747) is performed, and the special figure 1 display process ends. In the special figure 1 small hit fanfare middle processing transition setting process, the process of saving "7" as the processing number in the special figure 1 game processing number area, and the small hit fanfare time (for example, 4 ms) in the special figure 1 game processing timer area. ) Is saved.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step A727 that the small hit flag 1 is not a small hit (step A727; N), it is determined whether or not the final fluctuation with high probability is in progress (step A748).
Then, when it is determined in step A748 that the final fluctuation with high probability is in progress (step A748; Y), the probability of a hit result in the normal map fluctuation display game and the special figure fluctuation display game is set to the normal probability state (step A748; Y). A probability information command related to the information to be set as (low probability state) is prepared (step A749), and the effect command setting process (step A750) is performed. Subsequently, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery to save the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (step A751), and the right-handed instruction notification flag is cleared (step). A752), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is hit (big hit or small hit) (step A753). Note that step A752 is only an example assuming a mode in which right-handed instruction notification is performed in a high probability state, as in step A732 described above.

Next, when it is determined that the special figure 2 variation display game is not hit (step A753; N), the signal related to the left-handed instruction (launch position designation signal 1 is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A753; N). In step A754), in order to turn off the right-handed display LED, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A755). In this embodiment, when the special figure 2 variable display game is hit (big hit or small hit), right-handed is aimed at the big winning opening (special variable winning device 38) opened at that time. If the special figure 2 is hit (step A753; Y), the game proceeds to step A756 by passing steps A754 and A755. Further, when step A755 is completed, the process proceeds to step A756.

Then, when the process proceeds to step A756, the information indicating that the special figure 1 change in the special figure status area in the RWM is being changed (the special figure 1 change display game is being executed) is cleared (information subtraction) (step A756), and the special figure 1 game is performed. The processing number, that is, "0", which is usually related to the special figure 1 processing, is saved in the processing number area (step A757), and the special figure 1 display processing is terminated. When step A756 is executed, the special figure status becomes either a state in which only special figure 2 is changing or a state in which neither special figure 1 nor special figure 2 is changing.

[Processing during display of special figure 2]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 display process (step A50) in the special figure 2 game process described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 44, 45, and 46. FIG. 44 is a diagram (No. 1) showing a flowchart of the process during display of the special figure 2 of the first embodiment. FIG. 45 is a diagram (No. 2) showing a flowchart of the process during display of the special figure 2 of the first embodiment. FIG. 46 is a diagram (No. 3) showing a flowchart of the process during display of the special figure 2 of the first embodiment.

In the special figure 2 display process, first, the small hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is loaded (step A761), and the information of the small hit flag 2 area of the RWM is displayed. Clear (step A762).

Next, the jackpot flag 2 set in the jackpot flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is loaded (step A763), and the information in the jackpot flag 2 area of the RWM is cleared (step A764). Then, it is determined whether or not the loaded jackpot flag 2 is a jackpot (step A765), and if it is determined to be a jackpot (step A765; Y), the jackpot of the second special figure variation display game (special figure 2) is determined. Save the signal related to the start of the jackpot) in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A766), prepare the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation release command (step A767), perform the effect command setting process (step A768), and perform the number of rounds. The upper limit table is set (step A769). In addition, the signal regarding the start of the special figure 2 big hit includes a signal for turning on the signal for operating the condition device, a signal for turning on the signal for operating the continuous operation device for the accessory, and a signal for turning on the signal for hitting the special symbol 2. include.

Next, after setting the round number upper limit value table (step A769), the round number upper limit value corresponding to the round number upper limit value information (in the case of the first embodiment, for example, "16" or "4", or the like, for example, (There may be "8" or "2") is acquired and saved in the RWM round number upper limit area (step A770). Subsequently, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (step A771).

Next, the decorative special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is loaded from the hit special figure command area of the RWM, prepared (step A772), and the effect command setting process (step A773) is performed. Subsequently, a fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is prepared (step A774), and the effect command setting process (step A775) is performed. ..

Next, the large winning opening opening information and the signal corresponding to the state of the probability of winning in the normal figure fluctuation display game and the special figure fluctuation display game are saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step A776). In the case of the first embodiment, in step A776, two big hit signals and three big hit signals are saved as signals corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the state of probability. In addition, each on / off is determined by the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability. For example, the jackpot 2 signal is turned on if it is a jackpot other than 2R bumping, turned on if it is a 2R bumping jackpot with a high probability, and turned off if it is a 2R bumping jackpot with a low probability. Further, the jackpot 3 signal is turned on if it is a jackpot other than 2R collision, off if it is a 2R collision jackpot in high probability, and is turned on if it is a 2R collision jackpot in low probability.

After that, the jackpot fanfare time (for example, 5000 ms, 4700 ms, 7700 ms, or 300 ms) corresponding to the jackpot opening information is set (step A777), and the set jackpot fanfare time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step A777). Step A778).

The information of the large winning opening fraudulent winning number area is cleared (step A780), the fraud monitoring period out-of-period flag is saved in the large winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A781), and the process proceeds to step A784.

When moving to step A784, 3 is set as the processing number (step A784), the processing number, that is, "3" is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step A785), and the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing (step). A786) is performed, and the processing during display of special figure 2 is terminated.

On the other hand, in step A765, when the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (step A765; N), it is determined whether or not the loaded small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step A787), and the small hit flag 2 is small. When it is determined that it is a hit (step A787; Y), it is determined whether or not the final fluctuation with high probability is in progress (step A788).

Then, in step A788, when it is determined that the final fluctuation with high probability is in progress (step A788; Y), the probability of a hit result in the normal figure fluctuation display game and the special figure fluctuation display game is set to the normal probability state (step A788; Y). A probability information command related to the information to be set as (low probability state) is prepared (step A789), and the effect command setting process (step A790) is performed. Subsequently, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery to save the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (step A791), and the right-handed instruction notification flag is cleared (step). A792). In step A792, assuming a mode in which the right-handed instruction notification is performed in the high-probability state, the right-handed instruction notification flag is cleared because the high-probability final fluctuation is determined and the high-probability state is completed. Illustrate. However, when the present embodiment is a mode in which the right-handed instruction is not notified in the high-probability state, step A792 is deleted (or the left-handed instruction is notified in the high-probability state and the left-handed instruction is notified in step A792. There may be a configuration in which the flag is cleared).

Next, when step A792 is completed and when the high probability final fluctuation is not in progress (step A788; N), a command is loaded from the hit symbol command area and prepared (step A793), and the effect command setting process (step A793) is performed. Perform A794). Subsequently, a small hit fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is prepared (step A795), and the effect command setting process (step A796) is prepared. Is performed, and it is determined whether or not the game state is a predetermined state (for example, a state in which the fanfare support state, the big hit, or the special mode is not performed) in which the game state should be left-handed (step A797).

When it is determined in step A797 that the predetermined state should be left-handed (step A797; Y), the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step A798). The signal related to the left-handed instruction is, for example, a signal for turning off the launch position designation signal 1. Next, in order to turn off the right-handed display LED, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A799), and the process proceeds to step A803.

When the process proceeds to step A803, the information in the large winning opening fraudulent winning number area is cleared (step A803), the fraud monitoring period out-of-period flag is saved in the large winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A804), and the process proceeds to step A807. ..

When the process shifts to step A807, the special figure 2 small hit fanfare middle process transition setting process (step A807) is performed, and the special figure 2 display process ends. In the special figure 2 small hit fanfare middle processing transition setting process, the process of saving "7" as the processing number in the special figure 2 game processing number area, and the small hit fanfare time (for example, 4 ms) in the special figure 2 game processing timer area. ) Is saved.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step A787 that the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step A787; N), it is determined whether or not the final fluctuation with high probability is in progress (step A808).
Then, when it is determined in step A808 that the final fluctuation with high probability is in progress (step A808; Y), the probability of a hit result in the normal map fluctuation display game and the special figure fluctuation display game is set to the normal probability state (step A808; Y). A probability information command related to the information to be set as (low probability state) is prepared (step A809), and the effect command setting process (step A810) is performed. Subsequently, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery to save the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (step A811), and the right-handed instruction notification flag is cleared (step). A812), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit (step A813). Note that step A812 is only an example assuming a mode in which right-handed instruction notification is performed in a high probability state, as in step A792 described above.

Next, when it is determined that the special figure 1 variation display game is not a big hit (step A813; N), the signal related to the left-handed instruction (launch position designation signal 1 is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A813; N). In step A814), the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area in order to turn off the right-handed display LED (step A815). In this embodiment, when the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit, a right-handed hit should be made aiming at the big winning opening (special variable winning device 38) opened at that time. When the special figure 1 is a big hit (step A813; Y), it passes steps A814 and A815 and proceeds to step A816. Further, in the present embodiment, when the special figure 1 is not in the big hit (step A813; N) (including the case where the special figure 1 is in the small hit), the process proceeds to step A816 after executing steps A814 and A815. However, the processing content related to such right-handed and left-handed hits varies depending on the board configuration of the gaming machine and the game characteristics, and is only an example. Also, here, when step A815 is completed, the process proceeds to step A816.

Then, when the process proceeds to step A816, the information indicating that the special figure 2 in the special figure status area in the RWM is changing (the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is being executed) is cleared (information subtraction) (step A816), and the special figure 2 game is performed. In the process number area, the process number related to the special figure 2 normal process, that is, “0” is saved (step A817), and the special figure 2 display process is terminated. When step A816 is executed, the special figure status is either a state in which only special figure 1 is changing or a state in which neither special figure 1 nor special figure 2 is changing.

[External information editing process]
Next, the details of the external information editing process (step S78) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 and 48. FIG. 47 is a diagram (No. 1) showing a flowchart of the external information editing process of the first embodiment. FIG. 48 is a diagram (No. 2) showing a flowchart of the external information editing process of the first embodiment.

In the external information editing process, the monitoring results of the payout command transmission process (step S72), the winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step S67), the magnet fraud monitoring process (step S76), and the panel radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S77) are used. Based on this, the process of creating information to be output to an external device such as an information collection terminal or an internal management device of the amusement park or a test firing test device and setting it in the output buffer is performed.

In the external information editing process, first, a process of setting information according to an error state or a security state is performed. In the process of setting information according to the error status and security status, when a glass frame opening error is occurring (step C71; Y) and a main body frame opening error is occurring (step C72; Y), the door / frame The on-data of the open signal is saved in the external information output data area (step C73), and the on-data of the game machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step C74). That is, the occurrence of the glass frame opening error and the main body frame opening error is output as external information and a test signal.

On the other hand, when neither the glass frame opening error nor the main body frame opening error has occurred (steps C71 to C72; N), the off data of the door / frame opening signal is saved in the external information output data area (step). C75), the off-data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step C76).

Next, if the security signal control timer that measures a predetermined time (for example, 256 ms) from the time when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by operating the initialization switch or the like is not "0", "-1" is updated. (Step C77). The minimum value of the security signal control timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the security signal control timer is "0" (step C78).

When the value of the security signal control timer is not "0" (step C78; N), that is, when the time is not up, the on-data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step C79). On the other hand, when the value of the security signal control timer is "0" (step C78; Y), that is, when the time is up, the process of step C79 is passed. That is, from the time when the data stored in the RAM is initialized in the main process described above and the initial value (for example, 256 ms) is saved in the security signal control timer until the time is up of the security signal control timer. The on-data of the security signal is output as external information.

Next, magnet fraud is occurring (step C80; Y), panel radio fraud is occurring (step C81; Y), frame radio fraud is occurring (step C82; Y), and grand prize opening fraud is occurring (step C83; Y). Or, when an abnormal fluctuation is occurring in Special Figure 2 (step C84; Y), the on-data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step C85), and the on-data of the game machine error status signal is output as a test signal. Save to the data area (step C86). Similarly, even when an illegal operation is occurring, the on-data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step C85), and the on-data of the game machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area. (Step C86) The configuration may be used.

On the other hand, if none of the magnet fraud, board radio wave fraud, frame radio wave fraud, general power fraud, grand prize opening fraud, or special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation has occurred (steps C80 to C84; N), switch error 1 or It is determined whether or not the switch abnormality of the switch abnormality 2 is occurring (step C87), and if none of the switch abnormalities is occurring (step C87; N), the off-data of the gaming machine error status signal is output as a test signal. Save to the data area (step C88).

Then, when any of the switch abnormalities is occurring (step C87; Y), the on-data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step C86). Here, special figure 2 abnormality fluctuation, switch abnormality, etc. are abnormalities monitored by the winning port switch / status monitoring processing in the timer interrupt processing.

Next, after completing steps C86 or C88, in the external information editing process, the winning signal (starting port 1 signal) of the starting port 1 (starting winning opening 36, which is the starting winning opening in FIG. 1; normal variable winning device 37) ) Is performed in the start port 1 signal editing process (step C89), and the winning signal (starting port 2 signal) of the starting port 2 (starting winning port 92, which is the starting winning port in FIG. 2) is edited. The signal editing process (step C90) is performed. Subsequently, the main prize ball signal editing process (step C91) for editing the main prize ball signal related to the number of prize balls to be paid out is performed, and the symbol confirmation number signal is output based on the symbol confirmation number output number (symbol confirmation number signal output number). The symbol determination number signal editing process (step C92) for editing is performed, and the external information editing process is completed.

[Main processing]
Next, the main process of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 49. FIG. 49 is a diagram showing a flowchart of main processing in the effect control device of the first embodiment.

The main process is a process executed by the control unit (CPU311) of the effect control device 300 when the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is started.
[Step D11] The control unit disables interrupts.

[Step D12] The control unit performs initial settings of the CPU 311.
[Step D13] The control unit performs the initial setting of VDP 312.
[Step D14] The control unit allows interrupts.

[Step D15] The control unit permits the generation of display data. That is, the control unit permits the display circuit (not shown) in the VDP 312 to access the VRAM (not shown) in the VDP 312 and generate display data.

[Step D16] The control unit sets a random number seed. This is a process of setting a pseudo-random number generation sequence using, for example, a sland function. Here, the control unit may use a fixed value such as 0 (zero) as an argument given to the sland function, or use a value created based on the ID value of the CPU or the like so as to be different for each gaming machine. You may.

[Step D17] The control unit is an area to be initialized in the RWM (for example, RAM 322) of the effect control device 300 (for example, an effect flag area (a storage area used as various flags described later in the control process of the effect control device 300)). ) Saves the initial value when the power is turned on.

[Step D18] The control unit clears the WDT (watchdog timer).
[Step D19] The control unit executes the effect button input process. The effect button input process is a process for editing when the effect buttons (selection button switch 25a and enter button switch 25b) are operated when they are enabled. Since the effect button does not turn on and off at high speed, the control unit may perform the process of detecting the input of the effect button in the effect button input process or in a short-cycle timer interrupt (not shown). good.

[Step D20] The control unit executes the hall / player setting mode process. The hall / player setting mode process is a process for accepting operations such as setting a changeable range of the brightness and volume of the LED and the display device 41, and changing the brightness and volume of the LED and the display device 41 by the player.

[Step D21] The control unit executes the random number update process. The random number update process is a process of updating the pseudo-random number at least once in each control cycle of the main process by using, for example, the land function. Since the land function generates a random number based on the designated generation sequence each time the recalculation is performed, the control unit can obtain the random number only by executing the land function. A counter that increments by "1", such as the main board (game control device 100), may be used as a random number.

[Step D22] The control unit executes the reception command check process. The reception command check process will be described later with reference to FIG.
[Step D23] The control unit executes the effect display editing process. The effect display editing process is a process of setting various commands and their parameters for instructing the VDP 312 of the drawing contents on the display device 41. For example, the control unit sets commands in a table shape in the effect display editing process.

[Step D24] The control unit executes the drawing command preparation end setting. The drawing command preparation end setting is a process of setting that the preparation of all commands to the VDP 312 set in the effect display editing process is completed.

[Step D25] The control unit determines whether or not it is the frame switching timing, proceeds to step D26 if it is the frame switching timing, and waits for the frame switching timing if it is not the frame switching timing. Here, the frame switching timing is a time corresponding to a processing cycle (for example, 1/30 second ≈ 33.333 ms) created based on the cycle (for example, 1/60 second) of the V blank interrupt (also referred to as V sink interrupt). It is the timing to arrive at the target interval. The V blank interrupt is generated every time the VDP 312 completes one scan of the entire screen for drawing. As described above, the generation cycle of this V blank interrupt is, for example, 1/60 second. In the case of this embodiment, when the same drawing is repeated twice and the V blank interrupt occurs twice, the frame is switched, and the cycle of the frame switching timing is twice the cycle of the V blank interrupt (for example, 1/60 second). (For example, 1/30 second ≈ 33.33 ms). However, the present invention is not limited to this mode, and the frame switching timing can be arbitrarily changed. For example, frame switching (image update) may be performed at a cycle of 1/30 second or more, or less than 1/30 second. The frame may be switched at intervals.

By the frame switching timing determination processing, the subsequent processing (steps D26 to D30, and subsequent steps D18 to D24) is executed at this frame switching timing for each of the above processing cycles. The time management that needs to be synchronized with the effect content is performed in this frame unit (that is, the processing cycle unit). When the processing cycle is 1/30 second, for example, 3 frames have 100 ms. This is the same as the main board (game control device) managing the time value in units of 4 ms of the timer interrupt cycle.

[Step D26] The control unit instructs VDP 312 to draw a screen according to the command set in step D23. For example, the control unit sequentially transmits commands set in a table shape and instructs VDP 312 to draw a screen.

[Step D27] The control unit executes the sound control process. The sound control process is a process related to volume control of voice from speakers (upper speaker 19a, lower speaker 19b).

[Step D28] The control unit executes the decoration control process. The decoration control process is a process for controlling various LEDs and the like such as the board decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18.
[Step D29] The control unit executes the movable body control process. The movable body control process is a process for controlling a movable body (for example, a board effect device 44) including various motors and SOLs (solenoids).

[Step D30] The control unit executes the launch information control process. The launch information control process sets launch-related information based on the launch status flag, and also produces an effect according to the special map rotation state (the number of special map fluctuations per game for a predetermined amount of money (that is, the number of balls rented)). It is a process to perform mode correction of.

[Step D31] The control unit executes the information disclosure process. The information disclosure process is a process of disclosing performance information related to game performance to a player.
The control unit returns to step D18 after executing step D31, and thereafter repeatedly executes the processes of steps D18 to D31. That is, steps D18 to D31 constitute a loop process (sometimes referred to as a main loop process) that is repeatedly executed in the above process cycle after the effect control device 300 is activated.

The control unit executes the processes of steps D27 to D29 in the main loop process in order to match the effect of the screen, and signals and data (particularly various LEDs and motors) generated or set by these control processes are used. The process of actually outputting the drive control signal, etc. to the port is performed in a short-cycle timer interrupt (not shown). However, when an IC specialized for controlling various devices is used, there is a case where a signal or the like is not output by a timer interrupt only by instructing by serial communication or the like.

[Receive command check process]
Next, the received command check process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a received command check process in the effect control device of the first embodiment. The received command check process is a process executed by the control unit in step D22 of the main process.

The reception command (effect command) has a configuration including MODE data (1 byte) and ACTION data (1 byte), and the game control device (main board) 100 sends the effect command to the effect control device 300. Are transmitted in sequence. In the following, such data that constitutes a command will be referred to as command data or command data.

Further, the command reception process from the main board is performed by the "command reception interrupt process" (not shown). That is, in the serial communication of this example, transmission / reception is automatically performed by hardware (by the function of the CPU itself), and when the command reception is completed, an interrupt (command reception interrupt) is generated to notify the user. All you have to do is take it out of the buffer, but in the above "command reception interrupt processing", every time there is a command reception interrupt, the command is loaded from the serial reception buffer, and after checking whether the loaded command data is normal, the command is concerned. The data (MODE and ACTION data) is stored in the command buffer, and the value of the command reception counter is increased by "1" by the amount of the stored data. In the description of the control process, the term "storing" simply means that the device is readable and stored in a predetermined storage area for use in the subsequent control process (the same applies hereinafter). The command buffer is, for example, a ring buffer. This command buffer is composed of, for example, a storage area in the RAM 311a (or RAM 322) of the CPU 311. The capacity of the command buffer may be greater than or equal to the number of commands that may be transmitted from the main board in the system control cycle (the above-mentioned processing cycle; for example, 1/30 second).

[Step D41] The control unit loads the value of the command reception counter as the number of command receptions. The command reception counter is set in the RWM (RAM 322 or RAM 311a). Since the command reception counter is cleared to "0" in principle in step D43, the number of commands received during one frame (1/30 second) (time for one cycle of the above-mentioned processing cycle) is stored.

[Step D42] The control unit determines whether or not the number of command receptions is "0 (zero)", and if the number of command receptions is not "0", the process proceeds to step D43, and the number of command receptions is "0". If so, the received command check process is terminated. In the present application, as in step D41, “loading” data in the control process means extracting data from the RAM (RAM 322 or RAM 311a in the effect control device 300 of this example).

[Step D43] The control unit subtracts the contents of the command reception counter area (that is, the value of the command reception counter) by the number of command receptions.
If A: the value of the command reception counter and B: the number of commands received, "A = B" immediately after the execution of step D41. Immediately after the execution of step D43, the normal movement is "A = AB = 0", but in the embodiment of this example, the effect control device 300 is a command reception interrupt from the game control device (main board) 100. Is given the highest priority without disabling interrupts, so there is a possibility that the value of A increases between the processing of step D41 and the processing of step D43. Therefore, if the process of step D43 is set to "A ← 0" (that is, the process of setting the value of the command reception counter to zero), the command count will be deviated. Therefore, in step D43, the subtraction process of "AB" is performed. I'm doing it. However, when serial communication is used for sending and receiving commands from the main board as in this embodiment, interrupts are disabled so that the value of A does not increase between the processing of step D41 and the processing of step D153. Then, the processing content of step D43 may be set to "A ← 0".

[Step D44] The control unit sets the contents of the received command buffer (corresponding to the command buffer, hereinafter may be simply referred to as the command buffer) (that is, the command data stored in the address corresponding to the read pointer of the command buffer). Copy to the command area (sometimes called the command storage area). The command area is, for example, a storage area in RAM 322 or RAM 311a, and is a so-called FIFO format (first-in, first-out format) buffer.

[Step D45] Since the control unit has read the data in the command buffer, the control unit updates the value of the command read index, which is a pointer for reading the command buffer, by "1" in the range of "0" to "31", for example. Do it. The range of "0" to "31" here corresponds to the capacity of the command buffer (for example, "32").

[Step D46] The control unit determines whether or not the copy of the command for the number of command receptions has been completed (that is, whether or not steps D44 and D45 have been repeatedly executed for the number of command receptions). The control unit proceeds to step D47 when the copy of the command for the number of received commands is completed, and proceeds to step D44 when the copy is not completed.

[Step D47] The control unit loads (that is, reads) the contents of the command area (data stored first among the data not yet read in the command area, that is, data to be read next). do.

[Step D48] The control unit executes the received command analysis process. The received command analysis process is a process for analyzing the data of the loaded command (hereinafter referred to as the command this time). The received command analysis process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Step D49] The control unit updates the address of the command area (the address of the data to be read next).
[Step D50] The control unit determines whether or not the analysis of the commands for the number of command receptions has been completed (that is, whether or not steps D47 to D49 have been repeatedly executed for the number of command receptions). The control unit proceeds to step D47 when the analysis of the commands corresponding to the number of received commands has not been completed, and ends the received command check process when the analysis is completed.

[Received command analysis processing]
Next, the received command analysis process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a received command analysis process in the effect control device of the first embodiment. The received command analysis process is a process executed by the control unit in step D48 of the received command check process.

[Step D51] The control unit separates and stores the upper byte of the data of the current command loaded in step D47 of the received command check process in MODE and the lower byte in ACT. In the case of a fluctuation system command that commands the fluctuation pattern of the special figure, the upper byte data stored as MODE commands the first half fluctuation pattern, and the lower byte data stored as ACT commands the second half fluctuation pattern. It is a thing.

[Step D52] The control unit determines whether or not the value of MODE separated in step D51 is within the normal range. The control unit proceeds to step D53 when the MODE value is in the normal range, and ends the received command analysis process when the MODE value is not in the normal range. It should be noted that the value of MODE may not be defined and may not be used, and if it is such an unused value, it is determined in step D52 that it is not in the normal range.

[Step D53] The control unit determines whether or not the ACT value separated in step D51 is within the normal range. The control unit proceeds to step D54 when the ACT value is in the normal range, and ends the received command analysis process when the ACT value is not in the normal range.

Further, in step D53, it is determined whether or not the value of ACT separated in step D51 is within the normal range, for example, as follows. That is, the effective ACT value differs for each MODE, and the upper limit to the lower limit of the effective value of the ACT are defined in a predetermined ACTION check table (not shown), and in step D53, they are separated within the range of the upper limit to the lower limit. It is checked whether the ACT value is within the range, and if it is within the range, it is determined to be in the normal range (at this point, the toothlessness check described later has not been performed).

[Step D54] The control unit determines whether or not the separated ACT value is the correct combination with respect to the separated MODE value. The control unit proceeds to step D55 when the ACT values are the correct combination, and ends the received command analysis process when the ACT values are not the correct combination. Whether or not the ACT values are the correct combination can be determined using, for example, a match check table. In the match check table, all ACT values (ACTION values) valid for the MODE value are registered in order from the start address, and are provided for each MODE value. Then, if there is a separated ACT value in this match check table corresponding to the MODE value, it can be determined that the combination is correct, and if there is no separated ACT value in the match check table, it is correct. It can be determined that it is not a combination.

The determination of whether or not the ACT value is the correct combination is executed including the tooth omission check of whether or not the ACT value is a normal combination for MODE. For one MODE, there are multiple valid ACTs, but their values are not always continuous (that is, there are values that do not exist discontinuously and values that are missing teeth), so the command Is a valid value. Then, since only valid values are defined in the match check table, it is compared and confirmed one by one to see if they match any of them.

[Step D55] The control unit determines whether or not the MODE data is within the variable command range. The control unit executes variable command processing (details omitted) when the MODE value is within the variable command range (step D56), and proceeds to step D57 when the MODE data is not within the variable command range. ..

Here, the MODE data is the MODE data separated and stored in step D51 (the same applies to step D57 and the like described later). Further, a variable command (sometimes referred to as a variable command or a variable pattern command) is a command that commands a variable pattern of a special figure, and the range that the data of this variable command can take is the variable command range.

[Step D57] The control unit determines whether or not the MODE data is within the jackpot command range. The control unit executes the jackpot command processing (details omitted) when the MODE data is within the jackpot command range (step D58), and proceeds to step D59 when the MODE data is not within the jackpot command range. .. The jackpot command is a command for commanding an operation (display of a fanfare screen, a round screen, etc.) related to the production during the jackpot, and the range in which the data of the jackpot command can be obtained is the jackpot command range.

[Step D59] The control unit determines whether or not the MODE data is within the symbol-based command range. The control unit executes symbol-based command processing (details omitted) when the MODE value is within the symbol-based command range (step D60), and proceeds to step D61 when the MODE data is not within the symbol-based command range. .. A symbol command (sometimes called a symbol command or a decorative special symbol command) is a command for commanding information about a special symbol (for example, what the stop symbol of the special symbol should be), and this symbol command. The range that can be taken by the data is the design command range.

[Step D61] The control unit determines whether or not the MODE data is within the single-shot command range. The control unit executes single-shot command processing (details omitted) when the MODE value is within the single-shot command range (step D62), and proceeds to step D63 when the MODE data is not within the single-shot command range. .. Note that, unlike commands that make sense in combination, such as symbol commands and variable commands, commands that are established independently are called single-shot commands. Single-shot commands (sometimes called single-shot commands) include customer waiting demo commands, hold count commands, symbol stop commands, probability information commands, error / illegal commands, model specification commands, and the like. The range that the data of this one-shot command can take is the one-shot command range.

[Step D63] The control unit determines whether or not the MODE data is within the look-ahead symbol system command range. The control unit executes look-ahead symbol command processing (details omitted) when the MODE data is within the look-ahead symbol command range (step D64), and steps when the MODE data is not within the look-ahead symbol command range. Proceed to D65.

[Step D65] The control unit determines whether or not the MODE data is within the read-ahead variable command range. The control unit executes look-ahead variable command processing (details omitted) when the MODE data is within the look-ahead variable command range (step D66), and receives it when the MODE data is not within the look-ahead variable command range. End the command analysis process.

The look-ahead symbol command and the look-ahead variable command are commands for the look-ahead effect. When any of the processes of steps D56, D58, D60, D62, D64, and D66 is completed, the received command analysis process is completed.

Here, the look-ahead effect (also referred to as a look-ahead notice or a look-ahead notice effect) is a variable display game corresponding to a start winning memory (holding of the starting winning memory, or simply holding) in which the variable display game of the special figure has not been executed. In order to notify the player in advance whether or not the game will be a big hit (or what kind of fluctuation pattern it will be) when it is executed after that, the start winning memory is held and displayed in an unusual manner. Etc. The look-ahead command (look-ahead variable command and look-ahead symbol command) is a command that informs in advance the fluctuation pattern and the stop symbol corresponding to the hold of the start winning memory that is the target of the look-ahead effect, and is a game at the time of the start winning. It is transmitted from the control device 100 to the effect control device 300. It should be noted that normal variable commands and symbol commands that are not look-ahead are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the start of the variable display.

Next, the information disclosure function that makes it possible to perceive the setting information without excessively inciting gambling will be described with reference to FIGS. 52 to 67. First, the outline of the information disclosure function will be described with reference to FIG. 52. FIG. 52 is a diagram showing an example of an outline of the information disclosure function of the first embodiment.

The game control device 100 includes a set value change switch (set value change SW) 126, and makes it possible to change the set value of the game performance. The set value is from "0" to "5", and the hit probability of the special figure game can be changed in 6 steps. Further, the game control device 100 includes a probability setting value display device 136, and makes it possible to confirm the set value set by using the set value change switch 126 by displaying numerical values from "0" to "5".

Since the game control device 100 includes the set value change switch 126 and the probability set value display device 136 on the game control board, and the game control device 100 is provided on the back side of the front frame 12 of the game machine 10, the game is in progress. There is virtually no opportunity to be observed by the player. Further, the game control device 100 transmits various commands to the effect control device 300, but does not include information on the set value in the various commands and transmits the effect control device 300. As a result, the gaming machine 10 eliminates the opportunity to confirm the set value other than the game control device 100, and suppresses the leakage of the set value.

The effect control device 300 does not receive a command including information about the set value from the game control device 100, but receives various commands accompanying the progress of the game according to the set value. The effect control device 300 stores the game history in the FeRAM 323 based on various received commands. Since the FeRAM 323 is a non-volatile storage unit, it is possible to accumulate a game history for a predetermined period without losing it even if the power is turned off. The effect control device 300 calculates the game performance from the accumulated game history.

The effect control device 300 includes a push button 25. The push button 25 is an operation unit capable of receiving an operation input, and includes a selection button switch 25a and a decision button switch 25b described with reference to FIG. Here, the selection button switch 25a and the decision button switch 25b described with reference to FIG. 4 will be described again. The selection button switch 25a and the decision button switch 25b are signals detected by a combination of the detection signal of the touch sensor and the detection signal of the push button SW. For example, the state in which the touch sensor detects the touch operation corresponding to the selection operation and the push button SW detects the pressing operation of the option setting unit 25 corresponds to the ON state of the selection button switch 25a. Further, the state in which the touch sensor detects the touch operation corresponding to the determination operation and the push button SW detects the pressing operation of the option setting unit 25 corresponds to the ON state of the determination button switch 25b. Hereinafter, the option setting unit 25 is referred to as a push button or a PB (Push Button). The effect control device 300 can allow the player to select the display content of the performance information related to the game performance of the gaming machine 10 or select the notification opportunity of the performance information by the operation input by the push button 25.

The effect control device 300 can display the calculated performance information on the display device 41 with the default display content or the selected display content. Further, the effect control device 300 can display the calculated performance information on the display device 41 at the default notification opportunity or the selected notification opportunity. The display device 41 is a form of notification means, and the effect control device 300 includes other effect means (for example, speakers 19a and 19b, a frame decoration device 18, a board decoration device 46, a board effect device 44, and other effects. A sub-display device, LED, etc.) can be used as the notification means.

As a result, the effect control device 300 can disclose the performance information as the actual value according to the operation of the gaming machine 10, and as a result, the setting information can be perceived. Further, since the effect control device 300 does not directly disclose the information regarding the set value to the player, the gambling property is not excessively aggravated. Further, since the effect control device 300 does not receive the information regarding the set value from the game control device 100, the effect control device 300 does not leak the set value to the outside. In this way, the gaming machine 10 makes it possible to perceive the setting information without excessively inciting gambling.

Next, the information disclosure process executed by the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 53. FIG. 53 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the information disclosure process of the first embodiment. The information disclosure process is a process in which the effect control device 300 discloses the game performance according to the set value without acquiring the information regarding the set value from the game control device 100. The information disclosure process is a process performed by the control unit (CPU311) of the effect control device 300. The information disclosure process is a process executed by the control unit in step D31 (see FIG. 49) of the main process.

[Step D71] The control unit executes the setting process. The setting process is a process of accepting an operation of a player (may be an administrator or the like) and setting the disclosure content. The setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 54 and 55.

[Step D72] The control unit executes the collection process. The collection process is a process for collecting the game history. The collection process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 56 and 57.
[Step D73] The control unit executes the aggregation process. The aggregation process is a process of calculating (aggregating) game performance from the collected game history. The aggregation process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 58 to 60.

[Step D74] The control unit executes the output information editing process. The output information editing process is a process for editing the output mode of the calculated game performance. The output information editing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 61.

[Step D75] The control unit executes the in-game disclosure process. The in-game disclosure process is a process of disclosing the game performance during the game (special figure game) in the edited output mode. The in-game disclosure process will be described later with reference to FIG. 62.

[Step D76] The control unit executes the non-game disclosure process, and ends the information disclosure process after the non-game disclosure process is executed. The non-game disclosure process is a process of disclosing the game performance other than during the game (special figure game) in the edited output mode. The non-game disclosure process will be described later with reference to FIG. 66.

Next, the setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 54. FIG. 54 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the setting process of the first embodiment. The setting process is a process of accepting a player operation and setting the disclosure content. The setting process is a process performed by the control unit (CPU311) of the effect control device 300. The setting process is a process executed by the control unit in step D71 of the information disclosure process.

[Step D81] The control unit determines whether or not it is the setting acceptance timing. The setting reception timing is a timing that is preset as a timing at which the setting operation can be accepted, and for example, a customer waiting state is set as a timing that does not affect the progress of the game. The control unit proceeds to step D82 when it is the setting acceptance timing, and ends the setting process when it is not the setting acceptance timing.

[Step D82] The control unit causes the display device 41 to display the setting screen. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can guide the player to the setting operation according to the displayed contents.
[Step D83] The control unit sets the aggregation period according to the setting operation. The aggregation period is a period to be aggregated in the period for collecting history (history collection period). The control unit sets the aggregation period by making it possible to select whether to set the entire history collection period as the aggregation period or a part of the history collection period as the aggregation period. In addition, when a part of the history collection period is set as the aggregation period, the control unit makes it possible to set either the start and end, or the start and end, and the size of the period. As a result, the control unit can set the period desired by the player as the aggregation period.

[Step D84] The control unit sets the output information according to the setting operation. The output information is the performance information to be output from the calculated performance information. The control unit sets the output information by making it possible to select whether to output all of the calculated performance information or a part of the calculated performance information as an output target. As a result, the control unit can output the performance information desired by the player.

[Step D85] The control unit sets the filter according to the setting operation. The filter filters the calculated performance information according to the game state. The control unit sets a filter by making it possible to select whether to output all the game states of the calculated performance information or to output a specific game state of the calculated performance information. As a result, the control unit can output the performance information in the gaming state desired by the player.

[Step D86] The control unit requests the player to confirm the setting contents, proceeds to step D87 when the player confirms the setting contents, and sets when the player does not confirm the setting contents (for example, cancels). End the process.

[Step D87] The control unit updates the setting with the content received by the setting operation, and ends the setting process. The control unit may set a valid period (for example, 3 hours) in the updated setting contents and return to the default setting after the valid period elapses. Further, the control unit may set a default setting return condition (for example, transition to the customer waiting state) in the updated setting content, and return to the default setting after the condition is satisfied.

Next, the display screen of the display device 41 during the setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 55. FIG. 55 is a diagram showing an example of the setting screen of the first embodiment.
The display screen 350 shown in FIG. 55 (1) is a display screen displayed in step D82. The display screen 350 includes the title of the setting screen and the guidance of the setting operation in the display contents. For example, the display screen 350 displays "setting guessing assist" as the title of the setting screen, and displays the operation guidance using the push button 25 as the guidance for the setting operation.

The display screen 351 shown in FIG. 55 (2) is a display screen displayed in step D83. The display screen 351 is a display screen during which the aggregation period is set, and includes the title and options for which the aggregation period is set in the display content. For example, the display screen 351 displays "aggregation period setting" as the title during the aggregation period setting, and "1. all period", "2. variable period event", and "3. variable period" as options during the aggregation period setting. "Timer" and "4. Variable period user settings" are displayed. In addition, the display screen 351 displays the selected option among the options for which the aggregation period is set so that it can be distinguished from other options. For example, the display screen 351 underlines the option “4. Variable period user setting” to indicate that the option is being selected.

The option "1. All period" is an option for totaling the entire period of the accumulated history information. The option "2. Variable period event" is an option in which a predetermined event trigger in the accumulated history information is set to the start and end, or the start or end. The option "3. Variable period timer" is an option in which a predetermined timer trigger of the accumulated history information is set to the start and end, or the start or end. The option "4. Variable period user setting" is an option in which the user sets one of the start and end, or the start and end (the other is the default) of the accumulated history information.

The display screen 352 shown in FIG. 55 (3) is a display screen when "4. Variable period user setting" is selected as an option during the aggregation period setting. The display screen 352 is a display screen during option setting in the option "4. Variable period user setting", and includes a title and option setting content during option setting in the option "4. Variable period user setting" in the display content. For example, the display screen 352 displays "variable period user setting" as a title during option setting, and a total range selected from the history information accumulated as option setting content (from "from here" indicated by the illustrated hatching). The range of "up to here") is displayed.

The display screen 353 shown in FIG. 55 (4) is a display screen displayed in step D84. The display screen 353 is a display screen for which output information is being set, and includes a title and options for which output information is being set in the display content. For example, the display screen 353 displays "output information setting" as a title during output information setting, and displays "1. hit probability" and "2. corresponding setting value" as options during output information setting. Further, the display screen 353 displays the selected option among the options for which the output information is set so as to be distinguishable from the other options. For example, the display screen 353 underlines the option "1. Hit probability" to indicate that it is being selected. The selection during the output information setting may be one in which the options are exclusively selected, or one in which two or more options can be selected at the same time.

The option "1. Hit probability" is an option that uses the hit probability in the special figure game (the combined probability of the special figure game 1 and the special figure game 2, or the respective probabilities) as output information. The option "2. Corresponding set value" is an option in which the set value (estimated value) corresponding to the hit probability is used as output information.

The display screen 354 shown in FIG. 55 (5) is a display screen displayed in step D85. The display screen 354 is a display screen during filter setting, and includes titles and options during filter setting in the display contents. For example, the display screen 354 displays "filter setting" as the title during filter setting, and "1. all modes", "2. mode A", "3. mode B", "4" as options during filter setting. Mode C ”,“ 5. Low probability ”,“ 6. High probability ”,“ 7. Electric support ”, and“ 8. Non-electric support ”are displayed. Further, the display screen 354 displays the selected option among the options in the filter setting so that it can be distinguished from other options. For example, the display screen 354 underlines the option “6. High probability” to indicate that it is being selected.

The option "1. All modes" is an option in which all of the effect modes (or probability states) in the special figure game are targeted for output information. The options "2. Mode A", "3. Mode B", and "4. Mode C" are options for which the corresponding production mode among the production modes in the special figure game is the target of the output information. The option "5. Low probability" is an option for which the low probability state is the target of the output information among the probability states of the special figure game. The option "6. High probability" is an option for which the high probability state is the target of the output information among the probability states of the special figure game. The option "7. Electric support" is an option for which the output information is the state in which the normal electric support is provided (electric support) among the general electric support states of the special figure game. The option "8. Non-electric support" is an option for which the output information is the state in which there is no general electric support (non-electric support) among the general electric support states of the special figure game.

The display screen 355 shown in FIG. 55 (6) is a display screen displayed in step D86. The display screen 355 is a display screen for confirming the setting contents, and includes the title being confirmed for the setting contents and the options for confirming the setting contents in the display contents. For example, the display screen 355 displays "setting content confirmation" as the title for which the setting content is being confirmed, and displays "OK" and "cancel" as the options for which the setting content is being confirmed.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 can disclose the information desired by the player.
Next, the collection process will be described with reference to FIG. 56. FIG. 56 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the collection process of the first embodiment. The collection process is a process for collecting the game history. The collection process is a process performed by the control unit (CPU311) of the effect control device 300. The collection process is a process executed by the control unit in step D72 of the information disclosure process.

[Step D91] The control unit determines whether or not there has been an instruction to reset the game history. The game history reset instruction is preferably input by the administrator, and is, for example, an operation input of the RAM initialization switch 112 of the game control device 100. The control unit proceeds to step D92 when there is an instruction to reset the game history, and proceeds to step D95 when there is no instruction to reset the game history.

[Step D92] The control unit clears the game history storage area (game history storage area). For example, the control unit clears the game history stored in FeRAM 323 to zero.
[Step D93] The control unit generates dummy data of the game history. The dummy data is data that prevents the calculation of the game performance that greatly deviates from the design value when the game history is small, and is generated based on, for example, the average game performance of all the set values. The dummy data may be prepared in advance.

[Step D94] The control unit stores the generated dummy data in the game history storage area.
[Step D95] The control unit determines whether or not a command (target command) including information for which the game history is to be collected has been received. The control unit proceeds to step D96 when the target command is received, and ends the collection process when the target command is not received.

[Step D96] The control unit acquires event information when the target command is received.
[Step D97] The control unit acquires the game state when the target command is received. The game state to be acquired is a game state used for filtering the target of output information, and includes, for example, a type of production mode, a probability state of a special figure game, and a general electric support state of a special figure game.

[Step D98] The control unit stores the information for which the game history is to be collected and the game state when the target command is received in the game history storage area as the game history in association with each other. The game history storage area is, for example, a ring buffer, and the latest game history can be stored for a predetermined period by overwriting the old data with new data. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can accumulate the gaming history for a predetermined period including the dummy data. Further, the gaming machine 10 can accumulate the gaming history corresponding to the actual operation by replacing the dummy data with the gaming history.

Next, the game history stored in the game history storage area will be described with reference to FIG. 57. FIG. 57 is a diagram showing an example of the collected data of the first embodiment.
The control unit stores the game history as one event for each symbol change of the special figure game and one hit of the special figure game detected from the target command. The control unit assigns an event ID (ID) to each event and records the event type (type) and the event occurrence time (time). In addition, the control unit records the probability state (probability fluctuation) of the special figure game in which the event occurs, the normal power support state (electric support) of the special figure game, and the type of effect mode (effect mode) for each event.

For example, the game history of the ID "xxx111" is of type "variation (design variation)" and time "txxx111", and the game state at the time of event occurrence is probability variation "high (high probability)" and electric support "yes (normal)". (Electric support state) ”, indicating that the effect mode is“ A ”. The game history of the ID "xxx211" is of type "variation" and time "txxx211", and the game state at the time of event occurrence is probability variation "low (low probability)", electric support "yes", and production mode "A". ". In addition, the game history of the ID "xxx311" is the type "variation" and the time "txxx311", the game state at the time of the event is the probability fluctuation "low", the electric support "none (non-general support state)", and the production. Indicates that the mode is "B". In addition, the game history of the ID "xxx701" is the type "hit (big hit)" and the time "txxx701", and the game state at the time of the event is the probability fluctuation "-(undefined)", the electric support "-", and the effect. Indicates that the mode is "-". Even if the game state at the time of event occurrence is undefined for the event of type "hit", the control unit triggers the occurrence of hit by referring to the game state at the time of event occurrence of the immediately preceding type "fluctuation". It is possible to specify the game state of the variable display.

Next, the aggregation process will be described with reference to FIG. 58. FIG. 58 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the aggregation process of the first embodiment. The aggregation process is a process of calculating the game performance from the collected game history. The aggregation process is a process performed by the control unit (CPU311) of the effect control device 300. The aggregation process is a process executed by the control unit in step D73 of the information disclosure process.

[Step D101] The control unit determines whether or not it is the aggregation timing. The control unit sets the aggregation timing when there is a margin in the processing resources of the effect control device 300. For example, the control unit sets the aggregation timing to a state in which the game is not in progress (such as a waiting state for customers) or a symbol stop time after the symbol changes during the game. The control unit proceeds to step D102 when the aggregation timing is reached, and ends the aggregation process when it is not the aggregation timing.

[Step D102] The control unit acquires the aggregation period according to the setting.
[Step D103] The control unit aggregates the game history within the aggregation period among the game histories stored in the game history storage area for each game state.

[Step D104] The control unit stores the aggregation result (aggregation data) in the output information storage area (FeRAM323) and ends the aggregation process.
Next, the aggregated data stored in the output information storage area will be described with reference to FIG. 59. FIG. 59 is a diagram showing an example of aggregated data of the first embodiment. The user-set period aggregation data shown in FIG. 59 is aggregation data that aggregates the game history within the user-set aggregation period among the game history stored in the game history storage area.

The user-set period aggregated data includes a winning probability for each game state and a corresponding set value. The game states that are individually aggregated in the user-set period aggregation data are "low probability medium,-(regardless of general electric power support status)," low probability medium, with electric support "," low probability medium, without electric support ", There are "high probability medium,-", "high probability medium, with electric support", and "high probability medium, without electric support". In addition, there are "all modes", "mode A", "mode B", and "mode C" as the effect modes for individually totaling the user-set period total data. For example, in the game state "low probability medium,-", the hit probability "1/210" and the corresponding set value "3" are used as the aggregation result. The corresponding set value is an estimated value of the set value, and a set value having a game performance (hit probability) close to the hit probability "1/210" is selected and used as the aggregation result.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 can perform aggregation according to the gaming state. Further, the gaming machine 10 can perform a sufficiently reliable aggregation depending on the gaming state even when the number of data is not sufficient by performing the aggregation for each gaming state. For example, in the gaming machine 10, even when the number of hits data is not sufficiently obtained in the low probability, the number of hits data may be sufficiently obtained in the high probability. Further, since the gaming machine 10 performs aggregation for each of a plurality of gaming states or a plurality of production modes, it is possible to provide the aggregation result that the player believes regardless of the truth of the aggregation result. For example, the gaming machine 10 can give a high degree of satisfaction to a player who believes that the effect mode "mode A" is an aggregation result that correctly reflects the performance of the gaming machine. It should be noted that such mistakes of the player are corrected in the process of converging to the true value as the data is accumulated, and the gaming machine 10 makes it possible to provide the player with the process of converging to the true value as a new hobby.

Although the user-set period aggregated data has been described, the same can be applied to aggregated data for other aggregated periods. Further, the gaming machine 10 may aggregate the aggregated data of one aggregated period in parallel with the aggregated data of another aggregated period, or may aggregate one aggregated data in order to save processing resources. When aggregating the aggregated data of a period, the aggregated data of other aggregation periods may not be aggregated.

It should be noted that the gaming machine 10 can set the minimum amount of information for the aggregated data because the aggregated result that is too irrelevant will confuse the player. Next, securing the minimum amount of information of the aggregated data will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 is a diagram showing an example of securing the minimum amount of information in the aggregated data of the first embodiment.

FIG. 60 (1) shows the aggregated data that secures the minimum amount of information when the current day history information is used as the aggregated data. Since the history information on the day exceeds the minimum amount of information, all of it is used as aggregated data. The minimum amount of information is a preset threshold value.

Next, when the current day history information is used as the aggregated data, the aggregated data for which the minimum amount of information is not secured is shown in FIG. 60 (2). Since the history information on the day does not exceed the minimum amount of information, the shortage is supplemented with dummy data. The amount of dummy data to be supplemented can be reduced by increasing the history information on the day.

As another example, when the current day history information is used as the aggregated data, the aggregated data for which the minimum amount of information is not secured is shown in FIG. 60 (3). Since the current day history information does not exceed the minimum amount of information, the shortage is supplemented with the previous day history information. The amount of previous day history information to be replenished can be reduced by increasing the current day history information.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 can secure the minimum amount of information about the aggregated data, and can suppress the risk of presenting the incorrect aggregated result to the player.
Next, the output information editing process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 61 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the output information editing process of the first embodiment. The output information editing process is a process for editing the output mode of the calculated game performance. The output information editing process is a process performed by the control unit (CPU311) of the effect control device 300. The output information editing process is a process executed by the control unit in step D74 of the information disclosure process.

[Step D111] The control unit acquires the aggregation result of the aggregation process.
[Step D112] The control unit acquires the setting contents set in the setting process.
[Step D113] The control unit determines the output content (output mode) from the aggregated results according to the set content.

[Step D114] The control unit determines the output timing of the output content according to the set content or the game state, and ends the output information editing process. For example, the control unit determines at which timing the output content is to be output, depending on whether or not the game is in progress, whether or not the game is in motion, and whether or not the game is hit. More specifically, the control unit can quickly determine the output timing when the game is not in progress. Further, the control unit can determine the output timing waiting for the satisfaction of the preset output condition during the game. The output conditions set in advance take into consideration the matching with the game production and the influence on the game progress. For example, the control unit may generate an effect that can be replaced with the output content (for example, a character dialogue effect) or an effect that allows duplication with the output content (for example, a cut-in effect) while the variable display is in progress. Can be determined as the output timing. In addition, the control unit uses the generation timing of an effect that can be replaced with the output content (for example, an interval effect) or an effect that allows duplication with the output content (for example, an ending effect) as the output timing. Can be decided.

Next, the in-game disclosure process will be described with reference to FIG. 62. FIG. 62 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the in-game disclosure process of the first embodiment. The in-game disclosure process is a process of disclosing the game performance during the game (special figure game) in the edited output mode. The in-game disclosure process is a process performed by the control unit (CPU311) of the effect control device 300. The in-game disclosure process is a process executed by the control unit in step D75 of the information disclosure process.

[Step D121] The control unit determines whether or not the information disclosure timing is possible based on the output timing determined in step D114 of the output information editing process. The control unit proceeds to step D122 when the information disclosure timing is available, and ends the in-game disclosure process when the information disclosure timing is not available.

[Step D122] The control unit determines whether or not the lottery for information disclosure has been won. When the control unit wins the information disclosure lottery, the control unit proceeds to step D123 and subsequent steps to disclose the information. On the other hand, if the control unit does not win the information disclosure lottery, the control unit ends the in-game disclosure process without disclosing the information.

In this way, the control unit does not necessarily disclose information even when the information can be disclosed, but only when the lottery is won. The control unit suppresses frequent information disclosure during the game by disclosing information with a lottery probability of "less than 1" at the disclosure enable timing during the game (for example, during the reach production in the variable display game). In addition, the control unit responds to the player's disclosure request by disclosing information with a lottery probability of "1" at the disclosure enable timing during non-game (for example, waiting for a customer).

[Step D123] The control unit acquires the output content determined in step D113 of the output information editing process.
[Step D124] The control unit selects an effect pattern according to the output content. For example, the control unit selects one or more selectable effect patterns (for example, cut-in, character dialogue, etc.) prepared in advance.

[Step D125] The control unit sets the selected effect pattern so that it can be output by the notification means, and ends the in-game disclosure process.
Next, the information disclosure effect of the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 63 and 64. FIG. 63 is a diagram (No. 1) showing an example of the information disclosure screen of the first embodiment. FIG. 64 is a diagram (No. 2) showing an example of the information disclosure screen of the first embodiment.

The display screen 500 shown in FIG. 63 (1) is a display screen in which the symbol is stopped, and the symbol is stopped and displayed before the start of the fluctuation in the variation display game. The display screen 500 displays a large symbol group 501, a small symbol group 502, a special figure 1 hold number display 503, a special figure 2 hold number display 504, a hold display 505, and a hold digestion display 506.

The large symbol group 501 is in charge of game production for the purpose of improving the interest. Therefore, the large symbol group 501 is displayed in a large size by setting a variable display area in a substantially central portion of the display device 41. The large symbol group 501 includes a left symbol, a middle symbol, and a right symbol.

On the display screen 500, the left symbol indicates that the symbol is stopped at "3", the middle symbol indicates that the symbol is stopped at "5", and the right symbol indicates that the symbol is "7". Indicates that it is stopped at. That is, on the display screen 500, the large symbol group 501 indicates that the special symbol variation display game is in the stopped state (the symbol is stopped).

The small symbol group 502 is in charge of notifying the variable display state for the purpose of improving the ease of grasping the game state of the player. Therefore, the small symbol group 502 is displayed small on the peripheral edge of the display device 41 so as to ensure visibility without interfering with the display effect by the large symbol group 501. The small symbol group 502 includes a left symbol, a middle symbol, and a right symbol. On the display screen 500, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol constituting the small symbol group 502 all indicate that the corresponding special symbol variation display game is in the stopped state.

In general, the large symbol group 501 is displayed larger than the small symbol group 502, the degree of freedom of the display position is high, and the display mode can be greatly changed. On the contrary, the small symbol group 502 is displayed smaller than the large symbol group 501, and the degree of freedom of the display position is low (for example, the position is fixed).

The special figure 1 hold number display 503 displays the hold storage number of the special figure 1 game. On the display screen 500, the special figure 1 hold number display 503 indicates that the hold storage number of the special figure 1 game is “4”. The special figure 2 hold number display 504 displays the hold storage number of the special figure 2 game. On the display screen 500, the special figure 2 hold number display 504 indicates that the hold storage number of the special figure 2 game is “0”. The number of held storages displayed by the holding display 505 corresponds to the sum of the number of holding storages displayed by the special figure 1 holding number display 503 and the number of holding storages displayed by the special drawing 2 holding number display 504.

For example, when the special figure 1 hold number display 503 displays "4" and the special figure 2 hold number display 504 displays "0" as shown on the display screen 500, the hold display 505 displays four hold memory displays. Indicates that the number of reserved memories is "4".

The hold display 505 can clearly indicate the number of hold memories of the special figure variation display game and notify the degree of expectation for the game result for each hold memory according to the display mode (hold memory display displayed on the hold display 505).

The hold digestion display 506 can indicate whether or not the special figure variable display game is in the variable display state and notify the degree of expectation for the game result depending on the display mode. On the display screen 500, the hold digestion display 506 sets a blank in the frame to indicate that the special figure variation display game is in the stopped state. After this, the gaming machine 10 starts the variable display.

The display screen 510 shown in FIG. 63 (2) is a display screen after the variable display is started. The display screen 510 is a screen after the display screen 500, and shows a screen during variable display (during three symbols changing). On the display screen 510, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol of the large symbol group 501 are fluctuating, indicating that the special symbol variation display game is being displayed in a variable manner. Further, on the display screen 510, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol of the small symbol group 502 are fluctuating, indicating that the special symbol variation display game is being displayed in a variable manner.

On the display screen 510, the special figure 1 hold number display 503 indicates that the hold memory number of the special figure 1 game is "3", and the special figure 2 hold number display 504 indicates that the hold memory number of the special figure 2 game is "3". It indicates that it is "0", and the hold display 505 indicates that the hold storage number of the special figure variation display game is "3". Further, on the display screen 510, the hold digestion display 506 displays the hold storage display during digestion, indicating that the special figure variation display game is in the variation display.

The display screen 511 shown in FIG. 63 (3) is a display screen when a reach effect occurs after the start of the variable display. The display screen 511 is a screen after the display screen 510, and shows a screen in which the reach is changing, in which the left and right symbols display "3". The gaming machine 10 makes it possible to disclose the information calculated from the gaming history when a predetermined effect is generated during the reach fluctuation.

The display screen 512 shown in FIG. 63 (4) is a display screen of the cut-in effect during the reach effect. The display screen 512 is a screen after the display screen 511, and shows a screen in which the reach is changing, in which the left and right symbols display "3". The gaming machine 10 produces a predetermined degree of expectation with a cut-in display 513 (cut-in effect) for the variable display during the reach effect. The cut-in display 513 produces a predetermined degree of expectation by a rocket-like character 514 and a background. Further, the cut-in display 513 displays the disclosure information 515. For example, the disclosure information 515 includes "1/200" as the winning probability in the gaming state during the aggregation period set by the player. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can disclose information in cooperation with the gaming effect during the game.

The gaming machine 10 includes the disclosure information 515 in the display content in the cut-in effect during the reach effect, but the display content is not limited to this, and other variable displays such as during the character effect, the development effect, the temporary stop, and the re-variation are displayed. It may be inside or the symbol may be stopped.

The display screen 516 shown in FIG. 64 (1) is a display screen for the hit interval effect. The display screen 516 includes a hit type display 517, a game guide 518, a round display 519, and disclosure information 520 as display contents. The hit type display 517 indicates a hit name (for example, “X bonus”) in the production. The game guide 518 informs the player that the striking direction is the right game area. The round display 519 displays a symbol (for example, a star-shaped display) corresponding to the round, and indicates the current number of rounds and the final number of rounds. The disclosure information 520 includes "1/210" as the winning probability in the gaming state during the aggregation period set by the player. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can disclose information in cooperation with the winning gaming effect.

The gaming machine 10 includes the disclosure information 520 in the display content in the hit interval effect, but the display content is not limited to this, and may be during a fanfare, a round, an ending, or the like.

The display screen 521 shown in FIG. 64 (2) is a display screen during the general electric support (electric support). The display screen 521 includes a game status display 522, a game guide 518, and disclosure information 523 in the display contents. The game state display 522 indicates a game state name (for example, "electric support"). The game status display 522 may display the game effect name (for example, "mode A"). The disclosure information 523 displays the character in relation to the disclosure information, with "1/21" as the hit probability in the game state for the aggregation period set by the player. For example, a character such as a tiger suggests a setting (eg, setting "2") corresponding to a hit probability of "1/21".

The gaming machine 10 may disclose information limited to the gaming state in addition to the setting of the player or instead of the setting of the player. For example, in the gaming machine 10, the display screen 521 may display the hit probability during the normal electric support (electric support) as the disclosure information 523. Similarly, on the game machine 10, the display screen 521 displays the hit probability in high probability (including latent probability change), high probability (excluding latent probability change), and other gaming states as disclosure information 523. You may.

Further, on the display screen 521, the special figure 1 hold number display 503 indicates that the hold storage number of the special figure 1 game is "0", and the special figure 2 hold number display 504 indicates the hold memory of the special figure 2 game. Indicates that the number is "4". On the display screen 521, the hold display 505 and the hold digestion display 506 may be hidden but displayed in order to give priority to the visibility of the disclosure information 523.

The display screen 524 shown in FIG. 64 (3) is a display screen (another example) during the general electric support (electric support). The display screen 524 includes a game status display 522, a game guide 518, and disclosure information 525 in the display contents. The game state display 522 indicates a game state name (for example, "electric support"). The disclosure information 525 displays "1/18" as the winning probability in the game state for the aggregation period set by the player, and the character is displayed in relation to the disclosure information. For example, a character such as a boy suggests a setting (eg, setting "4") corresponding to a hit probability "1/18".

The display screen 526 shown in FIG. 64 (4) is a display screen waiting for customers. The display screen 526 includes disclosure information 527 and operation guidance 528 as display contents. The disclosure information 527 displays "mode A" as the game effect name (may be the game state name) set by the player, displays the hit probability "1/170" in the game effect "mode A", and displays the hit probability "1/170". The setting "5") is displayed as a setting corresponding to "1/170". The operation guide 528 displays the push button 25 corresponding to the operation unit and the operation guide. The gaming machine 10 may be able to update the aggregation period, aggregation content, and display content at any time according to the received operation for information disclosure while waiting for customers.

The gaming machine 10 can suggest the setting of the hit probability to the character, or can also display the background instead of the character. Next, the suggestion of setting the hit probability by the background display will be described with reference to FIG. 65. FIG. 65 is a diagram showing an example of a setting suggestion mode of the first embodiment.

The background display during information disclosure has a plurality of types of display modes depending on the suggested set value. The estimated set value "0" displays the background in a white (illustrated in plain light color) display mode. The estimated set value "1" displays the background in a blue (shown by diagonal hatching) display mode. The estimated set value "2" displays the background in a display mode of green (illustrated by cross hatching). The estimated set value "3" displays the background in a display mode of red (shown in plain dark color). The estimated set value "4" displays the background in the display mode of the petal pattern. The estimated set value "5" displays the background in a rainbow-colored display mode.

As a result, the control unit can suggest the estimated set value with the background color of the predetermined effect display. For example, the control unit can suggest the estimated set value "3" by setting the background display of the cut-in effect during the reach effect to a solid color on the display screen 512 shown in FIG. 63 (4). The control unit may suggest the estimated set value not only at the background color of the effect display but also at other display points. Further, the control unit may suggest the estimated set value not only by the color and the pattern but also by other display modes.

Next, the non-game disclosure process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 66 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the non-game disclosure process of the first embodiment. The non-game disclosure process is a process of disclosing the game performance other than during the game (special figure game) in the edited output mode. The non-game disclosure process is a process performed by the control unit (CPU311) of the effect control device 300. The non-game disclosure process is a process executed by the control unit in step D76 of the information disclosure process.

[Step D131] The control unit determines whether or not there is a disclosure request operation during non-game. For example, the control unit determines that a predetermined operation input from the push button 25 waiting for a customer is a disclosure request operation during non-game. The control unit proceeds to step D132 when there is a disclosure request operation during non-game, and ends the non-game disclosure process when there is no disclosure request operation during non-game.

[Step D132] The control unit accepts a disclosure content selection operation such as an aggregation period, a game state, and a display content.
[Step D133] The control unit discloses information on the aggregated data in the aggregation period and the gaming state selected by the player. For example, the control unit discloses information by the display device 41.

[Step D134] The control unit determines whether or not to end the information disclosure. The control unit determines that the predetermined operation input from the push button 25 waiting for the customer is the information disclosure end operation. Further, the control unit determines that the start of the game is an information disclosure end operation. If the control unit does not end the information disclosure, the control unit proceeds to step D132 and continues the information disclosure. On the other hand, the control unit ends the non-game disclosure process when the information disclosure ends.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 can disclose desired aggregated data to the player even during non-game.
Next, the in-game disclosure process of the modified example will be described with reference to FIG. 67. FIG. 67 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the in-game disclosure process of the modified example of the first embodiment. The gaming machine 10 of the modified example discloses information at the time of an effect (for example, a push button effect) accompanied by reception of a player operation during the game. The in-game disclosure process of the modified example is a process performed by the control unit (CPU311) of the effect control device 300. The in-game disclosure process of the modified example is a process executed by the control unit in step D75 of the information disclosure process.

[Step D141] The control unit determines whether or not the player operation has been received during the reception time of the effect accompanied by the reception of the player operation. The control unit proceeds to step D142 when there is no reception of the player operation, and proceeds to step D143 when the reception of the player operation is received.

[Step D142] When there is no reception of the player operation, the control unit selects a game production pattern (non-reception effect pattern) when the player operation is not received. The control unit sets the selected non-reception effect pattern and ends the in-game disclosure process. As described above, the gaming machine 10 does not give the player an opportunity to disclose information when the player operation is not accepted. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can encourage the player to participate in the game.

[Step D143] When the player operation is received, the control unit draws a lottery as to whether or not to disclose the information. The control unit proceeds to step D144 when the lottery for disclosing information is lost, and proceeds to step D145 when the lottery for disclosing information is won.

[Step D144] When the lottery for disclosing information is lost, the control unit selects a game effect pattern (reception effect pattern) that is a game effect pattern when the player operation is received and does not involve information disclosure. do. The control unit sets the selected reception effect pattern and ends the in-game disclosure process. As described above, the gaming machine 10 prepares a case where the player is not given an opportunity to disclose information even when the player operation is accepted. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can increase the value as a privilege for information disclosure and encourage the player to participate in the game.

[Step D145] When the lottery for disclosing information is won, the control unit acquires the output content determined in step D113 of the output information editing process.
[Step D146] The control unit selects an effect pattern (a game effect pattern accompanied by information disclosure (disclosure effect pattern)) that is a game effect pattern when a player operation is received and is in accordance with the output content. The control unit sets the selected disclosure effect pattern and ends the in-game disclosure process. In this way, the gaming machine 10 gives the player an opportunity to disclose information while producing a rarity even when the player's operation is accepted. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can increase the value as a privilege for information disclosure and encourage the player to participate in the game.

The gaming performance of the gaming machine 10 can be changed by changing the setting. Further, since the gaming machine 10 involves turning on the power to change the setting, if a sufficient amount of data can be secured, it is desirable to aggregate the data in units of historical information within a range not straddling the turning on the power. Further, the gaming machine 10 compares the history information before and after the power is turned on to estimate the presence or absence of the setting change, and if it is estimated that there is no setting change even if the history information straddles the power on, the power is turned on. It may be regarded as history information in a range that does not straddle.

Further, although the gaming machine 10 can notify the hit probability and the estimated set value, other performance information may be notified. For example, the gaming machine 10 may notify the probability fluctuation inrush rate, the electric support inrush rate, the probability fluctuation, the number of consecutive hits in the electric support, the number of winning prize balls, the base, and the like.

The settings in the gaming machine 10 may be set as follows to prevent fraud.
(1) The game control device 100 executes a process of forcibly initializing the information stored in the RAM 111C in the game microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 when the setting is changed. As a result, the gaming machine 10 prevents the gaming machine 10 from performing game control over different set values.

(2) The game control device 100 outputs a security signal from the external information terminal board 71 when the setting is changed and when the setting is confirmed. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can notify the externally connected device (for example, a hall computer, an information disclosure device such as a ring lamp) that the setting has been changed or the setting has been confirmed. The externally connected device that has input the security signal can notify that the setting has been changed or the setting has been confirmed by means of a notification means (lamp, sound (including voice), etc.). The game control device 100 may output a common security signal for setting change and setting confirmation, or may output a security signal that can distinguish between setting change and setting confirmation.

(3) The game control device 100 is housed in a board box and attached to the back surface side of the front frame 12. The game control device 100 is protected by a sealed board box except that the required operation unit (RAM initialization switch 112, setting value change switch 126, setting key switch 127), various connectors, and the like face the outside. As a result, the main medium (game microcomputer 111, etc.) that triggers the transition of setting change or setting confirmation is protected by the sealed substrate box. Further, in the game control device 100, the setting key switch 127 is faced to the outside, and the required operation units (RAM initialization switch 112, setting value change switch 126) other than the setting key switch 127 are sealed by a board box. It may be something to protect.

(4) The game control device 100 does not have a setting key by requiring the operation of the setting key switch 127 to access the main medium (game microcomputer 111, etc.) that triggers the transition of setting change or setting confirmation. Eliminate access to third party main media. The game control device 100 may be configured to enable access to a required operation unit (RAM initialization switch 112, set value change switch 126) by operating the setting key switch 127. For example, the game control device 100 may be configured to enable physical operation of the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting value change switch 126 (for example, opening / closing the operation window) by operating the setting key switch 127, or may be set. The operation of the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting value change switch 126 may be electrically or logically enabled by the operation of the key switch 127, or a combination thereof may be used.

(5) The game control device 100 includes a required operation unit (RAM initialization switch 112, set value change switch 126, setting key switch 127) and a required information display unit (status display device 135, probability setting value display device 136). Is controlled by the gaming microcomputer 111. The game control device 100 may include an error release switch used for error release and a game start switch that gives a game start trigger, and the error release switch and the game start switch are also controlled by the game microcomputer 111. You may do it.

(6) The game control device 100 determines four power-on states from the combination of the input states of the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 127. When the RAM initialization switch 112 is ON and the setting key switch 127 is ON, the game control device 100 is in a setting change state in which the set value can be changed, and when the RAM initialization switch 112 is OFF and the setting key switch 127 is ON. When the RAM initialization switch 112 is ON and the setting key switch 127 is OFF, the information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is set to the setting confirmation state in which the set value can be confirmed. Is set to the RAM clear (RWM clear) state for forcibly initializing, and when the RAM initialization switch 112 is OFF and the setting key switch 127 is OFF, the power is turned on to the power failure recovery (recovery) state.

(7) In the setting change state, the gaming machine 10 can change the setting in the following steps. The setting key switch 127 is turned off when the power is off, and the setting key is inserted (step 1). The setting key is operated (for example, turned) to switch the setting key switch 127 to the ON state (step 2). By turning on the power (power switch ON) while pressing the RAM initialization switch 112 (ON), the setting is changed (step 3). In the setting change state, the setting value is changed each time the setting value change switch 126 is pressed (step 4). By operating (for example, turning) the setting key and switching the setting key switch 127 to the OFF state, the set value is confirmed and the setting change state is terminated (step 5).

At this time, the setting change is notified in steps 3 and 4 by the notification means (for example, the display by the display device 41, the sound (voice) by the speakers 19a and 19b, and the light emission by the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46). At 5, the RAM clear is notified. Further, the external information output means (for example, the external information terminal plate 71) outputs the security signal in steps 3 and 4, and stops the output of the security signal in step 5. The game control device 100 executes RAM clear in step 3 prior to the RAM clear notification in step 5. That is, the game control device 100 gives priority to the setting change notification over the RAM clear notification, thereby promptly performing the setting value change notification and improving the effect as a fraud prevention measure. Further, the probability set value display device 136 turns off in steps 1 and 2, displays the set value in steps 3 and 4, and turns off in step 5. Further, the status display device 135 is turned off in steps 1 to 4, and the base value is displayed in step 5. The gaming machine 10 may be provided with the state display device 135 and the probability set value display device 136 integrally, and for example, the state display device 135 may also serve as the probability set value display device 136. In that case, the status display device 135 turns off in steps 1 and 2, displays the set value in steps 3 and 4, and displays the base value in step 5. The game state of the game control device 100 is before the start of the game in steps 3 and 4, the game starts in step 5, and the game is in progress thereafter.

(8) In the setting confirmation state, the gaming machine 10 can confirm the setting in the following steps. The setting key switch 127 is turned off when the power is off, and the setting key is inserted (step 1). The setting key is operated (for example, turned) to switch the setting key switch 127 to the ON state (step 2). By turning on the power (power switch ON) without pressing the RAM initialization switch 112 (OFF), the setting confirmation state is entered (step 3). The setting confirmation state is terminated by operating (for example, turning) the setting key and switching the setting key switch 127 to the OFF state (step 4).

At this time, the setting confirmation is notified in step 3 by the notification means (for example, the display by the display device 41, the sound (voice) by the speakers 19a and 19b, the light emission by the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46). Further, the external information output means (for example, the external information terminal plate 71) outputs the security signal in step 3 and stops the output of the security signal in step 4. Further, the probability set value display device 136 is turned off in steps 1 and 2, displays the set value in step 3, and is turned off in step 4. Further, the status display device 135 is turned off in steps 1 to 3 and displays the base value in step 4. The gaming machine 10 may be provided with the state display device 135 and the probability set value display device 136 integrally, and for example, the state display device 135 may also serve as the probability set value display device 136. In that case, the status display device 135 turns off in steps 1 and 2, displays the set value in step 3, and displays the base value in step 4. The game state of the game control device 100 is before the start of the game in step 3, the game starts in step 4, and the game is in progress thereafter.

The gaming machine 10 is designed so that setting changes and setting confirmations can be performed only before the start of the game when the power is turned on. As a result, the gaming machine 10 eliminates setting changes and setting confirmations during the game, facilitating operation guarantee during the game.

The gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment (including the modified example) described above has the following features on one side.
(1) The gaming machine 10 has a main control device (game control device 100) that controls a game by making settings related to the game selectable from a plurality of types, and a slave control that performs production control based on a command from the main control device. A device (effect control device 300) is provided. The slave control device includes a control unit (CPU311) that generates a game history based on a command, calculates a game performance in a predetermined game state from the game history, and notifies the game performance at a predetermined notification trigger.

(2) The control unit of (1) generates a game history based on a command accompanying the progress of the game according to the set value.
(3) The control unit of (1) accepts the operation of the player (or the administrator, etc.) and sets the notification content (disclosure content).

(4) The control unit of (1) notifies (discloses) the game performance during the game (special figure game).
(5) The control unit of (1) notifies (discloses) the game performance except during the game (special figure game) (for example, waiting for a customer).

(6) The control unit of (1) makes it possible to set a period (aggregation period) to be aggregated among the periods for collecting history (history collection period).
(7) The control unit of (1) sets the minimum amount of information for the aggregated data, and fills the shortage of the minimum amount of information with dummy data.

(8) The control unit of (1) sets the minimum amount of information for the aggregated data, and sets the shortage of the minimum amount of information to the past history information (for example, the previous day's history information, or similar aggregated data even before the previous day). Replenish with the history information you have).

[Second Embodiment]
Next, the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment will be described. Conventionally, one control program has been shared for the same processing, such as using the same table data even if different input parameters (commands) are used for the effect control process in the effect control device 300. However, when it is desired to modify only the processing of some input parameters (commands) in the development process, the development burden tends to increase. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment prepares each control program when the input parameters (commands) are different even in the same processing such as using the same table data. As a result, when the gaming machine 10 wants to modify only the processing of some input parameters (commands) in the development process, it is sufficient to modify the modification range only for the processing of the input parameters, and the program development burden can be reduced.

First, a typical variation display sequence of the special figure game (special figure 1 game, special figure 2 game) of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 68. FIG. 68 is a diagram showing an example of a variable display sequence of the second embodiment.

In the illustrated variation display sequence, the time T00 from the variation start timing t0 to the variation stop timing t3 is defined as the variation display time (including the temporary stop time and excluding the symbol stop time). In this fluctuation display sequence, the time T01 from the fluctuation start timing t0 to the timing t1 is set as the first half fluctuation, the time T02 is set as the second half fluctuation from the timing t1 to the timing t2, and the time T03 from the timing t2 to the fluctuation stop timing t3 is temporarily stopped. do.

The effect control device 300 receives the fluctuation start command from the game control device 100 to start the symbol fluctuation (start fluctuation), and receives the stop command to stop the symbol fluctuation (stop fluctuation). The variation start command may be one command or a command set consisting of two or more commands (for example, a stop symbol command, a variation pattern command, a hold command, etc.).

The effect control device 300 receives the variation start command and determines the effect control content for each of the first half variation, the second half variation, and the temporary stop. The latter half fluctuation may include a temporary stop. Therefore, the effect control device 300 determines the effect control content of the first half variation by one effect control program, and determines the effect control content of the second half variation by another effect control program. Further, the variation display sequence can include one or more sub-effects as a sub-sequence in the basic sequence when the first half variation, the second half variation, and the temporary stop are set as the basic sequence.

For example, the effect control device 300 can selectively include the sub-effect of time T04 and the sub-effect of time T05 in the first half variation from the variation start timing t0 to the timing t1.

The effect control device 300 determines all the effect control contents (lottery) by the start of the first half fluctuation, and performs the effect control during the change according to the determined effect control content. The production control content may be determined (lottery) at any time according to the progress of the control.

Next, the effect distribution for each effect control program that determines the effect control content in the variable display will be described with reference to FIG. 69. FIG. 69 is a diagram showing an example of an effect control unit for variable display of the second embodiment.

The table of FIG. 69 (1) shows the combination of the first half variation and the second half variation of the effect control program unit. First half fluctuation There is no paired second half fluctuation of "shortening loss", "normal loss", "step-up loss", and "pseudo-continuous loss". That is, the first half fluctuation "shortening loss", "normal loss", "step-up loss", and "pseudo-continuous loss" pass the second half fluctuation and temporarily stop.

On the other hand, the first half fluctuation "normal reach", "step-up reach", and "pseudo-continuous reach" are paired with the second half fluctuation "step-up distribution". The latter half fluctuation "step-up distribution" has two or more distribution patterns, although details are omitted.

The effect control device 300 is applied to each of the first half fluctuation "shortening loss", "normal loss", "normal reach", "step-up loss", "step-up reach", "pseudo-continuous loss", and "pseudo-continuous reach". Prepare the corresponding production control program. Further, the effect control device 300 prepares an effect control program corresponding to each distribution pattern of the latter half variation “step-up distribution”.

The table of FIG. 69 (2) shows a list of sub-effects. Sub-directions include "PB (push button) notice" and "PB background change". The effect control device 300 prepares an effect control program corresponding to each sub effect.

The effect control program may be provided with one effect control program corresponding to one input parameter (command), or one effect control corresponding to two or more input parameters (commands). A program may be provided. Further, the effect control program may be a subroutine or the like in one program as long as the control unit is independent, and is not limited to the independent program.

Next, the effect control program and the reference table group in the first half variation will be described with reference to FIG. 70. FIG. 70 is a diagram showing an example of a combination of a control program of an effect control unit and a reference table group in the first half variation of the second embodiment.

The effect control device 300 executes the first half variation program (effect control program) "program MP1" while referring to the reference table group (table set) "table set MA", thereby performing the effect control content of the first half variation "shortening loss". To determine.

Further, the effect control device 300 determines the effect control content of the first half variation "normal loss" by executing the first half variation program "program MP2" while referring to the reference table group "table set MB".

Further, the effect control device 300 determines the effect control content of the first half variation "normal reach" by executing the first half variation program "program MP3" while referring to the reference table group "table set MB".

Further, the effect control device 300 determines the effect control content of the first half variation "step-up loss" by executing the first half variation program "program MP4" while referring to the reference table group "table set MC".

Further, the effect control device 300 determines the effect control content of the first half variation "step-up reach" by executing the first half variation program "program MP5" while referring to the reference table group "table set MC".

Further, the effect control device 300 determines the effect control content of the first half variation "pseudo continuous loss" by executing the first half variation program "program MP6" while referring to the reference table group "table set MD".

Further, the effect control device 300 determines the effect control content of the first half variation "pseudo continuous reach" by executing the first half variation program "program MP7" while referring to the reference table group "table set MD".

In this way, the effect control device 300 prepares an effect control program for each variation in the first half. Further, the effect control device 300 prepares a table set for each variation in the first half. The table set may be prepared for each effect control program (for example, the table set “table set MA”) or shared by two or more effect control programs (for example, the table set “table set MA”). It may be a table set MB ").

Next, the effect control program and the reference table group in the sub-effect will be described with reference to FIG. 71. FIG. 71 is a diagram showing an example of a combination of a control program of an effect control unit and a reference table group in the sub-effect of the second embodiment.

The effect control device 300 executes the sub-effect program (effect control program) "program SP1" while referring to the reference table group (table set) "table set SA" to control the effect of the sub-effect "PB notice". To determine.

Further, the effect control device 300 determines the effect control content of the sub effect "PB background change" by executing the sub effect program "program SP2" while referring to the reference table group "table set SB".

In this way, the effect control device 300 prepares an effect control program for each sub effect. Further, the effect control device 300 prepares a table set for each sub effect. The table set may be prepared for each effect control program (for example, the table set "table set SA"), or may be shared by two or more effect control programs.

Although the combination of the control program of the effect control unit and the reference table group has been described for the first half variation and the sub-effect, the same applies to the second half variation. In the following, the first half variation and the sub-effect will be described, and the same description of the second half variation will be omitted.

Next, the effect control program executed in the process of determining the effect control content of the first half variation and the referenced table set will be described with reference to FIG. 72. FIG. 72 is a diagram showing an example of a combination of a control program and a reference table group in the first half variation execution control of the second embodiment.

When the effect control device 300 receives the fluctuation start command related to the normal loss, the effect control device 300 executes the first half fluctuation program "program MP2" while referring to the reference table group "table set MB", from the fluctuation start timing t0 to the timing t1. The production control content of the first half fluctuation "normal loss" of is determined.

Further, when the effect control device 300 receives the fluctuation start command related to the normal reach, the effect control device 300 executes the first half fluctuation program "program MP3" while referring to the reference table group "table set MB", thereby timing from the fluctuation start timing t0. The production control content of the first half fluctuation "normal reach" up to t1 is determined.

The first half variable programs "program MP2" and "program MP3" are prepared separately, but the reference table group to be referred to is the same (reference table group "table set MB"), and the control contents are the same. be.

Further, the first half fluctuation programs "program MP2" and "program MP3" enable the sub-effects "PB notice" and "PB background change" to be executed during the first half fluctuation, respectively. For example, the effect control device 300 determines the execution of the sub effect "PB notice" during the execution of the first half variation program "program MP2" or "program MP3". When the effect control device 300 executes the sub effect "PB notice", the effect control device 300 executes the sub effect program "program SP1" while referring to the reference table group "table set SA", thereby executing the sub effect "program SP1" at time T04. Determine the production control content of "PB notice". Further, the effect control device 300 determines the execution of the sub effect "PB background change" during the execution of the first half variation program "program MP2" or "program MP3". When the effect control device 300 executes the sub effect "PB background change", the effect control device 300 executes the sub effect program "program SP2" while referring to the reference table group "table set SB", whereby the sub effect of time T04 is executed. The production control content of the "PB notice" is determined.

Next, the table set “table set MB” referred to by the effect control device 300 during the execution of the first half variation programs “program MP2” and “program MP3” will be described with reference to FIG. 73. FIG. 73 is a diagram showing an example of a control program and a table selection pattern in the first half variation of the second embodiment.

The table set "table set MB" includes a table "table MB1", a table "table MB2", a table "table MB3", a table "table MB4", and a table "table MB5".

Each table is a data table and includes an effect pattern that can be selected for each input parameter (command) and a selection probability (lottery probability) thereof. For example, the table "table MB1" includes the effect patterns "pattern 11", "pattern 12", "pattern 13", and "pattern 14". Further, the table "table MB2" includes the effect patterns "pattern 21" and "pattern 22". Further, the table "table MB3" includes the effect patterns "pattern 31" and "pattern 32". Further, the table "table MB4" includes the effect patterns "pattern 41" and "pattern 42". Further, the table "table MB5" includes the effect patterns "pattern 51" and "pattern 52". The effect pattern included in each table may be only one or two or more.

The solid line connecting the tables in the figure shows the control sequences of the first half variation programs "program MP2" and "program MP3". For example, the first half variation programs "program MP2" and "program MP3" have a control sequence that first refers to the table "table MB1" and selects an effect pattern defined by the table "table MB1". When the effect pattern "pattern 11" is selected in the table "table MB1", the first half variation programs "program MP2" and "program MP3" refer to the table "table MB2" and the effect pattern defined by the table "table MB2". Has a control sequence to select. Further, in the first half variation programs "program MP2" and "program MP3", when the effect pattern "pattern 12" is selected in the table "table MB1", the table "table MB3" is referred to and the table "table MB3" defines. It has a control sequence for selecting an effect pattern. Further, in the first half variation programs "program MP2" and "program MP3", when the effect pattern "pattern 13" or "pattern 14" is selected in the table "table MB1", the effect control contents of the sub effect "PB notice" are displayed. It has a control sequence that executes (executes a subsequence) the sub-effect program "program SP1" to be determined.

Then, the first half fluctuation programs "program MP2" and "program MP3" are control sequences that end the first half fluctuation and connect to the second half fluctuation "second half A" when the effect pattern "pattern 21" is selected in the table "table MB2". Have. Further, in the first half variation programs "program MP2" and "program MP3", when the effect pattern "pattern 22" is selected in the table "table MB2", the table "table MB4" is referred to and the table "table MB4" defines. It has a control sequence for selecting an effect pattern.

Then, the first half fluctuation programs "program MP2" and "program MP3" are control sequences that end the first half fluctuation and connect to the second half fluctuation "second half A" when the effect pattern "pattern 31" is selected in the table "table MB3". Have. Further, the first half fluctuation programs "program MP2" and "program MP3" are control sequences that end the first half fluctuation and connect to the second half fluctuation "second half B" when the effect pattern "pattern 32" is selected in the table "table MB3". Have.

Then, when the effect pattern "pattern 41" or "pattern 42" is selected in the table "table MB4", the first half fluctuation programs "program MP2" and "program MP3" end the first half fluctuation and end the second half fluctuation "second half A". Has a control sequence to connect to.

Then, the first half variable programs "program MP2" and "program MP3" refer to the table "table MB5" after executing the sub-effect program "program SP1", and control to select the effect pattern defined by the table "table MB5". Has a sequence.

Then, the first half variation programs "program MP2" and "program MP3" are sub-effect programs that determine the effect control content of the sub-effect "PB background change" when the effect pattern "pattern 51" is selected in the table "table MB5". It has a control sequence for executing "program SP2" (execution of subsequence). Further, the first half fluctuation programs "program MP2" and "program MP3" are control sequences that end the first half fluctuation and connect to the second half fluctuation "second half C" when the effect pattern "pattern 52" is selected in the table "table MB5". Have.

Then, the first half fluctuation programs "program MP2" and "program MP3" have a control sequence for ending the first half fluctuation and connecting to the second half fluctuation "second half C" after executing the sub-effect program "program SP2".

In this way, the effect control device 300 can determine the effect content of the first half variation.
Next, the table set "table set SA" referred to by the effect control device 300 during the execution of the sub-effect program "program SP1" and the table set "table set SB" referred to during the execution of the sub-effect program "program SP2". Will be described with reference to FIG. 74. FIG. 74 is a diagram showing an example of a control program and a table selection pattern in the sub-effect of the second embodiment.

FIG. 74 (1) shows a table set “table set SA” referred to by the effect control device 300 during execution of the sub-effect program “program SP1”. The table set "table set SA" includes the table "table SA1". The table "table SA1" includes the effect patterns "pattern 61", "pattern 62", "pattern 63", and "pattern 64".

The solid line connecting the tables in the figure indicates the control sequence of the sub-effect program "program SP1". For example, the sub-effect program "program SP1" has a control sequence that refers to the table "table SA1" and selects the effect pattern defined by the table "table SA1".

The sub-effect program "program SP1" is a caller (regardless of which of the effect patterns "Pattern 61", "Pattern 62", "Pattern 63", and "Pattern 64" is selected in the table "Table SA1". It has a control sequence that returns to the program of the execution source (for example, the first half variable program “program MP2”).

The effect pattern "pattern 61" (indicated by cross-hatching) is a specific effect that requires attention to the consistency of the effect, and is, for example, a correct effect. The correct effect can be selected only by the variable display that derives the hit, and must not be selected by the variable display that does not derive the hit.

Since the sub-effect program "program SP1" and the table set "table set SA" (table "table SA1") include such a specific effect as the control target, the first half variation program "program" is a control point that requires attention to consistency. It is separated from "MP2" and "Program MP3". That is, since the effect control device 300 separates the control points requiring attention from the first half variation programs "program MP2" and "program MP3" and the table set "table set MB", the first half variation programs "program MP2" and "program MP3" And the consistency as a whole is ensured while ensuring the degree of freedom for changing the table set "table set MB".

FIG. 74 (2) shows a table set “table set SB” referred to by the effect control device 300 during execution of the sub-effect program “program SP2”. The table set "table set SB" includes the tables "table SB1" and "table SB2". The table "table SB1" includes the effect patterns "pattern 71" and "pattern 72". The table "table SB2" includes the effect patterns "pattern 81" and "pattern 82".

The solid line connecting the tables in the figure indicates the control sequence of the sub-effect program "program SP2". For example, the sub-effect program "program SP2" has a control sequence that first refers to the table "table SB1" and selects the effect pattern defined by the table "table SB1".

Then, when the effect pattern "pattern 71" is selected in the table "table SB1", the sub-effect program "program SP2" refers to the table "table SB2" and selects the effect pattern defined by the table "table SB2". Has a control sequence. Further, when the effect pattern "pattern 72" is selected in the table "table SB1", the sub-effect program "program SP2" returns to the program of the caller (execution source) (for example, the first half variable program "program MP2"). Has a control sequence.

Then, the sub-effect program "program SP2" is a program of the caller (execution source) (for example, regardless of which of the effect patterns "pattern 81" and "pattern 82" is selected in the table "table SB2". It has a control sequence that returns to the first half variation program "program MP2").

The effect patterns "Pattern 71" and "Pattern 81" (indicated by cross-hatching) are specific effects that require attention to the consistency of the effects, and are, for example, correct effects. The correct effect can be selected only by the variable display that derives the hit, and must not be selected by the variable display that does not derive the hit.

Since the sub-effect program "program SP2" and the table set "table set SB" (tables "table SB1" and "table SB2") include such specific effects as control targets, they are control points that require attention to consistency. It is separated from the first half variable programs "program MP2" and "program MP3". That is, since the effect control device 300 separates the control points requiring attention from the first half variation programs "program MP2" and "program MP3" and the table set "table set MB", the first half variation programs "program MP2" and "program MP3" And the consistency as a whole is ensured while ensuring the degree of freedom for changing the table set "table set MB".

Next, the table data will be described with reference to FIG. 75. FIG. 75 is a diagram showing an example of table data of the second embodiment.
FIG. 75 (1) shows the table data of the table “table MB1”. The table "table MB1" includes an effect pattern that can be selected for each input parameter (command) and a selection probability (lottery probability) thereof. For example, the table "table MB1" includes the effect patterns "pattern 11", "pattern 12", "pattern 13", and "pattern 14" as selectable effect patterns. In the table "table MB1", when the command A is used as an input parameter, that is, when the fluctuation start command is the command A, the selection probability of the effect pattern "pattern 11" is "A11%", and the effect pattern "pattern 12". The selection probability of the effect pattern "Pattern 13" is "A12%", the selection probability of the effect pattern "Pattern 13" is "A13%", and the selection probability of the effect pattern "Pattern 14" is "A14%". At this time, the sum of the selection probabilities of all the effect patterns is "100%". The same applies when command B or command D is an input parameter.

The table "table MB1" indicates that none of the effect patterns "pattern 11", "pattern 12", "pattern 13", and "pattern 14" is selected when the command C is used as an input parameter. In other words, the table "table MB1" indicates that command C is not an input parameter.

FIG. 75 (2) shows the table data of the table “table SB1”. The table "table SB1" includes an effect pattern that can be selected for each input parameter (command) and a selection probability (lottery probability) thereof. For example, the table "table SB1" includes the effect patterns "pattern 71" and "pattern 72" as selectable effect patterns. In the table "table SB1", when the command A is used as an input parameter, that is, when the fluctuation start command is the command A, the selection probability of the effect pattern "pattern 71" is "A71%", and the effect pattern "pattern 72". Indicates that the selection probability of is "A72%". At this time, the sum of the selection probabilities of all the effect patterns is "100%". The same applies when command B or command D is an input parameter.

The table "table SB1" shows that neither the effect pattern "pattern 71" nor the "pattern 72" is selected when the command C is used as an input parameter. In other words, the table "table SB1" indicates that command C is not an input parameter.

Further, in the table "table SB1", the pattern "pattern 71" is used as a specific effect. The table "table SB1" includes the pattern "pattern 71". Therefore, the table "table SB1" can close the range requiring attention to the consistency of the effect to the range of the table "table SB1" even if there is a change regarding the pattern "pattern 71".

Although the tables "table MB1" and "table SB1" have been described as representatives, the same can be applied to other tables.
Next, the first half effect distribution processing will be described with reference to FIG. 76. FIG. 76 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the first half effect distribution processing of the second embodiment. The first half effect distribution process is a process of distributing the first half variable program to be executed for each input parameter (command). The first half effect distribution process is a process performed by the control unit (CPU311) of the effect control device 300. The first half effect distribution process is a process executed by the control unit in step D56 of the received command analysis process.

[Step D151] The control unit acquires a command (variation start command) as an input parameter.
[Step D152] The control unit branches to a step corresponding to the acquired command (first half effect distribution).

[Step D153] The control unit executes the shortened loss process when the acquired command is a command corresponding to the first half fluctuation "shortened loss". The shortened loss process is a process of executing the first half variation program "program MP1" while referring to the reference table group "table set MA". The control unit ends the first half effect distribution process after executing the shortened loss process.

[Step D154] When the acquired command is a command corresponding to the first half fluctuation "normal loss", the control unit executes the normal loss process. The normal loss process is a process of executing the first half variation program "program MP2" while referring to the reference table group "table set MB". The control unit normally ends the first half effect distribution process after executing the loss process.

[Step D155] When the acquired command is a command corresponding to the first half fluctuation "normal reach", the control unit executes the normal reach process. The normal reach process is a process of executing the first half variation program "program MP3" while referring to the reference table group "table set MB". The control unit usually ends the first half effect distribution process after executing the reach process.

[Step D156] The control unit executes the step-up loss process when the acquired command is a command corresponding to the first half fluctuation "step-up loss". The step-up loss process is a process of executing the first half variation program "program MP4" while referring to the reference table group "table set MC". The control unit ends the first half effect distribution process after executing the step-up loss process.

[Step D157] The control unit executes the step-up reach process when the acquired command is a command corresponding to the first half variation "step-up reach". The step-up reach process is a process of executing the first half variation program "program MP5" while referring to the reference table group "table set MC". The control unit ends the first half effect distribution process after executing the step-up reach process.

[Step D158] When the acquired command is a command corresponding to the first half fluctuation "pseudo-continuous loss", the control unit executes the pseudo-continuous loss process. The pseudo-continuous loss process is a process of executing the first half variation program "program MP6" while referring to the reference table group "table set MD". The control unit ends the first half effect distribution process after executing the pseudo-continuous loss process.

[Step D159] The control unit executes the pseudo-continuous reach process when the acquired command is a command corresponding to the first half variation "pseudo-continuous reach". The pseudo-continuous reach process is a process of executing the first half variation program "program MP7" while referring to the reference table group "table set MD". The control unit ends the first half effect distribution process after executing the pseudo-continuous reach process.

Next, on behalf of shortened loss processing, normal loss processing, normal reach processing, step-up loss processing, step-up reach processing, pseudo-continuous loss processing, and pseudo-continuous reach processing, normal loss processing is performed using FIG. 77. explain. FIG. 77 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the normal loss processing of the second embodiment.

The normal loss process is a process of executing the first half variation program "program MP2" while referring to the reference table group "table set MB". Normally, the loss process is a process performed by the control unit (CPU311) of the effect control device 300. The normal loss process is a process executed by the control unit in step D154 of the first half effect distribution process.

[Step D161] The control unit acquires a table set (reference table group "table set MB").
[Step D162] The control unit sets the first sequence.

[Step D163] The control unit selects a table corresponding to the set sequence.
[Step D164] The control unit selects and sets an effect pattern by lottery with reference to the selected table.

[Step D165] The control unit determines whether or not the current sequence is the last sequence. If the current sequence is not the last sequence, the control unit proceeds to step D166, and if it is the last sequence, the control unit normally ends the loss process.

[Step D166] The control unit updates the sequence.
[Step D167] The control unit proceeds to step D163 when the updated sequence specifies the next table selection, and proceeds to step D168 when the updated sequence specifies the execution of the sub-effect.

[Step D168] The control unit distributes sub-effects according to the updated sequence. The control unit proceeds to step D169 when the sub-effect according to the updated sequence is a PB notice, and proceeds to step D170 when the sub-effect is a PB background change.

[Step D169] The control unit executes the PB notice process. The PB notice process is a process of executing the sub-effect program "program SP1" while referring to the reference table group "table set SA". The control unit proceeds to step D165 after executing the PB advance notice process.

[Step D170] The control unit executes the PB background change process. The PB background change process is a process of executing the sub-effect program "program SP2" while referring to the reference table group "table set SB". The control unit proceeds to step D165 after executing the PB background change process.

Next, the PB background change process will be described with reference to FIG. 78 on behalf of the PB notice process and the PB background change process. FIG. 78 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the PB background change process of the second embodiment.

The PB background change process is a process of executing the sub-effect program "program SP2" while referring to the reference table group "table set SB". The PB background change process is a process performed by the control unit (CPU311) of the effect control device 300. The PB background change process is a process executed by the control unit during the execution of the effect control program (for example, step D170 of the normal loss process).

[Step D171] The control unit acquires a table set (reference table group "table set SA").
[Step D172] The control unit sets the first sequence.

[Step D173] The control unit selects a table corresponding to the set sequence.
[Step D174] The control unit selects and sets an effect pattern by lottery with reference to the selected table.

[Step D175] The control unit determines whether or not the current sequence is the last sequence. If the current sequence is not the last sequence, the control unit proceeds to step D176, and if it is the last sequence, the control unit ends the PB background change process.

[Step D176] The control unit updates the sequence and proceeds to step D173.
The gaming machine 10 reduces the development burden of the program of the effect control device 300 by such an effect control program.

For example, the first half fluctuation "normal loss" and the first half fluctuation "normal reach" are realized by the process of executing the first half fluctuation program "program MP2" while the same production control is performed, and the first half fluctuation "normal loss" is realized. "Normal reach" is realized by the process of executing the first half variable program "program MP3". That is, the first half fluctuation "normal loss" and the first half fluctuation "normal reach" realize the same effect control by different programs.

Here, a case where the effect control content of the first half variation “normal reach” is changed in the development process will be described with reference to FIGS. 79 and 80. FIG. 79 is a diagram (No. 1) showing an example of a control program and a table selection pattern in the first half variation modified in the development process of the second embodiment. FIG. 80 is a diagram (No. 2) showing an example of a control program and a table selection pattern in the first half variation modified in the development process of the second embodiment.

In the first half fluctuation "normal reach" in the development process, the reference table group is replaced with the reference table group "table set MBa". As a result, the first half fluctuation that refers to the reference table group "table set MB" is only the first half fluctuation "normal loss".

Further, in the development process, the change from the first half fluctuation program "program MP3" to the first half fluctuation program "program MP3a" has no effect on the first half fluctuation "normal loss".

In the reference table group "table set MBa", the table "table MB4" is replaced with the table "table MB9". In addition, the first half variation program "Program MP3a" has three locations before and after the table "Table MB9" and one location away from the table "Table MB9" (after the table "Table MB3"), for a total of four locations. The branch is replaced with.

Such a change in the control content of the first half fluctuation "normal reach" in the development process also becomes the first half fluctuation "normal loss" when the program is shared between the first half fluctuation "normal loss" and the first half fluctuation "normal reach". It will reach. However, since the gaming machine 10 does not share the program between the first half fluctuation "normal loss" and the first half fluctuation "normal reach", the range of influence of the change in the control content can be separated.

Although both the first half variation program and the reference table group are changed in the gaming machine 10, one of them may be changed.
In addition, the first half variation "normal reach" includes PB notice processing and PB background change processing in its control range, but the processing contents of PB notice processing and PB background change processing are entrusted to each sub-directing program. Independent of the first half fluctuation program. Therefore, the PB notice processing and the PB background change processing are not affected by the change of the first half variation program and its reference table group.

The gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment (including the modified example) described above has the following features on one side.
(1) The gaming machine 10 includes a main control device (game control device 100) that performs game control, and a slave control device (effect control device 300) that performs effect control based on commands from the main control device. The slave control device has a storage unit that stores table data that defines the distribution of the effect, and table data (reference table group "table") based on the first command among the commands (for example, a fluctuation start command corresponding to a normal loss). The production distribution from the "set MB", the reference table group "table set SA", and the reference table group "table set SB") is assigned to the first program (for example, the first half fluctuation program "program MP2" of the first half fluctuation "normal loss"). The second control, which is controlled by execution (normal loss processing), and the second command, which is different from the first program in the production distribution from the table data based on the second command (for example, the fluctuation start command corresponding to the normal reach). A control unit (CPU311) capable of executing a second control (normal reach processing) controlled by executing a program (for example, the first half fluctuation program “program MP3” of the first half fluctuation “normal reach”) is included.
(2) The table data of (1) includes a first table data (reference table group "table set MB") that does not include a specific effect, and a second table data (reference table group "table set SA") that includes a specific effect. Including the reference table group “table set SB”), the control unit executes the first control of distributing the effect from the first table data based on the first command by executing the first program, and of the second program. By executing, the second control that distributes the effect from the first table data is executed based on the second command, and the sub-effect program of the third program (for example, the sub-variation "PB notice") different from the first program and the second program. By executing the "program SP1"), the third control (PB notice processing) for distributing the effect from the second table data is executed based on the first command or the second command.

[Third Embodiment]
First, the configuration of the gaming board of the gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82. FIG. 81 is a front view (No. 1) showing an example of the gaming board of the gaming machine of the third embodiment. FIG. 82 is a front view (No. 2) showing an example of the gaming board of the gaming machine of the third embodiment.

The game board 700 in FIG. 81 shows a state in which the movable accessory is stored, and the game board 700 in FIG. 82 shows a state in which the stored movable accessory is visibly displayed.
As shown in FIGS. 81 and 82, the game board 700 is provided with a center case 40 substantially in the center. Inside the center case 40, there are a display device 41, a second display device 701, lighting units 702a to 702c, a logo display unit 703, a first board effect device 704, and a second board effect device 705L, 705R. , The third board effect device 706 and the fourth board effect device 707 are provided.

The second display device 701 notifies information about the game (for example, the production of the game) by the display. In the game board 700, the second display device 701 has a hexagonal shape, and a display unit for displaying predetermined information such as characters is formed in the central portion, and a frame portion is formed so as to surround the display unit. .. The frame portion is configured so that it can be lit with a plurality of lighting colors (for example, it is composed of LEDs).

The lighting units 702a to 702c notify information about the game (progress of the game, etc.) depending on the lighting state. In the game board 700, the lighting unit 702a displays "1", the lighting unit 702b displays "2", and the lighting unit 702c displays "3". The gaming machine 10 notifies that the progress is in the first stage by, for example, setting the lighting unit 702a in the lighting state and the lighting unit 702b and the lighting unit 702c in the extinguishing state, and lights the lighting unit 702a and the lighting unit 702b. By setting the lighting unit 702c to the off state, it is notified that the progress status is the second stage, and by setting the lighting units 702a to 702c to the lighting state, the progress status is the third stage (for example, the production is started). It is just before the event).

The lighting units 702a to 702c may be configured to be movable (for example, rotatable or swingable). In this case, the gaming machine 10 can more easily grasp that the lighting state (lighting / extinguishing) has changed by moving the lighting units 702a to 702c when switching from extinguishing to lighting.

The logo display unit 703 is composed of a plurality of characters (plurality of constituent units) for displaying the product name (product name, brand, etc.) of the gaming machine 10. Each component of the logo display unit 703 is configured so that it can be lit in a plurality of lighting colors (for example, it is composed of LEDs), and the logo display unit 703 provides information on the game (progress of the game, etc.) depending on the lighting state. Notify.

In the game board 700, the logo display unit 703 is composed of seven components (characters) of "A", "B", "C", "D", "E", "F", and "G", and each component is lit in a lighting color. Is configured to be controllable.

For example, the logo display unit 703 turns off all the components at the start of the effect, increases the number of components in the lit state as the effect progresses, and sets all the components in the lit state at the end timing of the effect. By doing so, the progress status of the game (progress status of the production) is notified. The logo display unit 703 turns off all the components at the start of the effect, increases the number of components in the lit state as the effect progresses, and turns on all the components only in the case of a big hit. Then, the progress status of the game (progress status of the production) may be notified.

The first board effect device 704 produces a game by operating. In the game board 700, the first board effect device 704 has a gourd-like shape. The first board effect device 704 is provided on the left side of the display device 41, and as shown in FIG. 81, the upper portion can be tilted toward the display device 41 and can operate up to a position where the upper portion overlaps the front side of the display device 41. It has become.

The second board effect devices 705L and 705R produce the game by operating. In the game board 700, the second board effect device 705L is arranged (for example, stored so as not to be visible) at a position where it does not overlap with the display device 41 on the upper left side of the display device 41 in the normal state (when not in operation). At the time of operation, as shown in FIG. 82, it appears on the upper left of the display device 41, and it is possible to operate so that the front side of the display device 41 extends from the upper left of the display device 41 toward the center of the display device 41. Further, the second board effect device 705R is arranged at a position where it does not overlap with the display device 41 on the upper right side of the display device 41 during normal operation (when not in operation) (for example, it is stored so as not to be visible), and FIG. As shown in the above, it appears at the upper right of the display device 41, and can be operated so as to extend the front side of the display device 41 toward the center of the display device 41 from the upper right of the display device 41.

The third board effect device 706 produces a game by operating. In the game board 700, the third board effect device 706 is arranged (stored) on the back side of the second display device 701 in the normal state (during non-operation), and is arranged (stored) on the back side of the second display device 701 in the normal state (when not in operation). Appearing above, the front side of the display device 41 can be operated from above the display device 41 toward the center of the display device 41.

In the game board 700, the second board effect devices 705L and 705R and the third board effect device 706 are connected to each other in a state of operating in the central portion, and the three board effect devices are integrally formed to form a predetermined shape. It is configured to be possible.

The fourth board effect device 707 produces a game by operating. The fourth board effect device 707 is a character shape related to the effect of the gaming machine 10. In the game board 700, the fourth board effect device 707 is arranged (for example, stored so as not to be visible) at a position where it does not overlap with the display device 41 on the lower left side of the display device 41 in the normal state (when it is not movable). During operation, as shown in FIG. 82, it appears on the front side of the lower part of the display device 41, and the front side of the lower part of the display device 41 can be operated left and right. The fourth board effect device 707 may be capable of operating the weapon held by the character, and in addition to the operation in the left-right direction, the operation in the vertical direction and the operation of tilting the character are possible. You may.

The above is an example of the game board 700 of the game machine 10 in the third embodiment. Next, the configuration of the display screen in the display device 41 of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 83. FIG. 83 is a diagram (No. 1) showing an example of a display screen displayed by the display device according to the third embodiment.

The display screen 708 has two sets of decorative symbols (large symbol group 709, small symbol group 710), special figure 1 hold number display 711, special figure 2 hold number display 712, hold display 713, and hold digestion display 714. And the hold digestion pedestal display 715 and the notice display 716 are included in the display contents.

The two sets of decorative symbols include a large symbol group 709 as the first decorative symbol and a small symbol group 710 as the second decorative symbol. The large design group 709 is in charge of game production for the purpose of improving the interest. Therefore, the large symbol group 709 is displayed large in the substantially central portion of the display device 41. The large symbol group 709 includes the left symbol 709L, the middle symbol 709C, and the right symbol 709R. The left symbol 709L, the middle symbol 709C, and the right symbol 709R all indicate that the corresponding special symbol variation display game is in the symbol variation state.

Generally, the large symbol group 709 starts to change in the order of the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C, and stops (including temporary stop) in the order of the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C. Therefore, in many cases, the large symbol group 709 forms a reach mode with the left symbol 709L and the right symbol 709R, and waits for the stop of the middle symbol 709C to form a hit mode.

The small symbol group 710 is in charge of notifying the variable display state for the purpose of improving the ease of grasping the game state of the player. Therefore, the small symbol group 710 is displayed small on the peripheral edge of the display device 41 so as to ensure visibility without interfering with the display effect by the large symbol group 709. The small symbol group 710 includes a left symbol, a middle symbol, and a right symbol. The left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol in the small symbol group 710 of the display screen 708 all indicate that the corresponding special symbol variation display game is in the symbol variation state.

The special figure 1 hold number display 711 displays the hold storage number (starting memory number) of the special figure 1 game. The special figure 2 hold number display 712 displays the hold storage number of the special figure 2 game. The hold display 713 can clearly indicate the number of hold storages of the special figure variation display game and notify the reliability (expectation degree) of the game result for each hold storage according to the display mode. The hold memory indicates the execution right of the special figure variation display game. For example, the hold display 713 changes the display mode (character) of the hold storage display (hold memory display displaying the hold memory) corresponding to each hold memory (for example, when the reliability is high, the general-purpose character to the dedicated character). The reliability of the game result is notified by changing to). In addition, the hold display 713 is a game depending on the operation mode (for example, the character is set to the walking mode in normal times and the character is set to the running mode when the reliability is high) instead of the change in the display mode of the hold storage display. The reliability of the result may be notified.

Depending on the display mode, the hold digestion display 714 can indicate the variable state of the special figure variation display game and notify the reliability of the game result. In FIG. 83, the hold digestion display 714 indicates that the special figure variation display game is in the process of symbol variation. For example, the hold digestion display 714 trusts the game result by changing the display mode (character) of the hold memory display corresponding to the hold memory (for example, changing from a general-purpose character to a dedicated character when the reliability is high). Notify the degree. In addition, the hold digestion display 714 is changed depending on the operation mode (for example, the character is set to the walking mode in normal times, and the character is set to the running mode when the reliability is high) instead of the change in the display mode of the hold memory display. The reliability of the game result may be notified.

The hold digestion pedestal display 715 clearly indicates the position where the hold digestion display 714 is displayed. The hold digestion pedestal display 715 includes a character display and a pedestal display. The character display displays a character that is a motif of the effect performed by the gaming machine 10. In FIG. 83, the character display displays a character like a tiger. The pedestal display displays a scaffold on which the hold memory display (character) corresponding to the hold memory during digestion and the character displayed by the character display are located.

The notice display 716 gives notice of the effect (giving privilege) performed by the hold memory in standby or the hold memory in digestion. The notice display 716 displays a treasure chest and a gourd, and is an effect corresponding to an item (symbol) to be displayed at the time of digestion of the pending memory during standby or the pending memory during digestion (in FIG. 83, a mode like a treasure chest). The effect corresponding to the item of the above and the effect corresponding to the item of the form such as a gourd) are notified. The notice display 716 is hidden when the item is not in stock.

The item displayed on the notice display 716 is added by opening the baggage at the start of digestion of the hold memory (hold memory display in the form of the character holding the baggage) displayed in the form of holding the baggage. The luggage will appear at a predetermined timing. The luggage may appear from the timing (at the start of display) when the hold storage display starts to be displayed on the hold display 713, or may appear from the middle.

Next, the relationship between the items appearing from the luggage and the effect (privilege to be given) to be performed will be described with reference to FIG. 84. FIG. 84 is a diagram showing an example of the relationship between the items appearing from the luggage and the contents thereof in the third embodiment.

Items appearing from the luggage are patterns P1 to P5. The item of pattern P1 is an item (symbol) having a skull-like shape. The item of pattern P1 clearly indicates that it is a waste (the effect of opening the baggage is a failure (fan effect)). When an item of pattern P1 appears from the luggage, the item is not stocked (added) on the notice display 716.

The item of pattern P2 is an item having a heart-like shape. The item of the pattern P2 clearly indicates that the effect PT acquisition effect of acquiring the effect PT (points) is performed in either the hold memory during digestion or the hold memory during standby. For example, in the gaming machine 10, the right to execute the effect can be acquired by accumulating the effect PT up to a predetermined value. When an item of pattern P2 appears from the luggage, an item having a heart-like shape is stocked on the notice display 716.

The item of pattern P3 is an item having a mode like a gourd. The item of pattern P3 clearly indicates that the effect PT acquisition effect is performed in either the hold memory during digestion or the hold memory during standby. When an item of pattern P3 appears from the luggage, an item having a mode like a gourd is stocked on the notice display 716.

The item of the pattern P4 is an item having a mode indicating a push button (PB) (an item having a mode of a push button). The item of pattern P4 uses a push button (accompanied by the operation of the push button) in either the hold memory during digestion or the hold memory during standby. By doing so, it is clarified that the production) that reminds us that the variable display game is being played multiple times) will be performed. When an item of pattern P4 appears from the luggage, the item in the form of indicating a push button is stocked on the notice display 716. It should be noted that the pseudo-continuous effect using the push button executed based on the item in the mode indicating the push button may be a dedicated effect different from the effect using the push button performed independently of the item.

The item of pattern P5 is an item shaped like a treasure chest. The item of the pattern P5 clearly indicates that the opening effect of the treasure box (the effect that the item appears from the opening of the treasure box) is performed in either the reserved memory during digestion or the reserved memory during waiting. When an item of pattern P5 appears from the luggage, the item in the form of a treasure box is stocked on the notice display 716.

Next, the items appearing from the treasure chest will be described with reference to FIG. 85. FIG. 85 is a diagram showing an example of the relationship between the items appearing from the treasure chest and the contents thereof in the third embodiment.
Items appearing from the treasure chest in the opening effect of the treasure chest are patterns P10 to P14. The item of pattern P10 is an item having a skull-like shape. It is clearly shown that the item of pattern P10 is a ghost (it does not develop from the treasure chest opening effect). If an item with pattern P10 appears from the treasure chest while the hold memory is being digested (during the special figure variation display game), the effect related to the appearing item will not be performed after the opening effect of the treasure box is completed. ..

The item of pattern P11 is an item having a heart-like shape. It is clarified that the item of the pattern P11 develops into the production PT acquisition production. If an item with pattern P11 appears from the treasure box while the hold memory is being digested (during the special figure variation display game), after the opening effect of the treasure box is finished, the effect PT acquisition effect is produced in the special figure variation display game. Is done.

The item of pattern P12 is an item having a gourd-like shape. It is clarified that the item of the pattern P12 develops into the production PT acquisition production. If an item with pattern P12 appears from the treasure box while the hold memory is being digested (during the special figure variation display game), after the opening effect of the treasure box is finished, the effect PT acquisition effect is produced in the special figure variation display game. Is done.

The item of the pattern P13 is an item of a mode in which the character of continuation is displayed. It is clarified that the item of the pattern P13 develops into a pseudo-continuous production. If an item with pattern P13 appears from the treasure chest while the hold memory is being digested (during the special figure variation display game), after the opening effect of the treasure box is finished, a pseudo-continuous effect is performed in the special figure variation display game. It is carried out.

The item of the pattern P14 is an item in a mode of displaying the characters of intense heat. The item of pattern P14 clearly shows that it has high reliability (for example, 60%). If an item with pattern P14 appears from the treasure box while the hold memory is being digested (during the special figure variation display game), the reliability is high in the special figure variation display game after the opening effect of the treasure box is completed. The production is done.

Next, an example of the production of the variable display game executed by the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 88. FIG. 86 is a diagram (No. 2) showing an example of a display screen displayed by the display device according to the third embodiment. FIG. 87 is a diagram (No. 3) showing an example of a display screen displayed by the display device according to the third embodiment. FIG. 88 is a diagram (No. 4) showing an example of a display screen displayed by the display device according to the third embodiment.

The display screen 717 shown in FIG. 86 (1) is a display screen in which the symbol variation is stopped (the variation display game is stopped), and shows a state in which there are no items stocked in the notice display 716.
On the display screen 717, the notice display 716 is hidden because there are no items in stock on the notice display 716. Further, on the display screen 717, since the symbol fluctuation is stopped, the hold storage display is not displayed on the hold digestion display 714. Further, on the display screen 717, the hold storage display in the mode of holding the luggage is located at the first (first) position in the hold display 713, and when the next holding storage is started to be digested, the item appears from the luggage. It is clearly stated.

The display screen 718 shown in FIG. 86 (2) is a display screen after the display screen 717, and shows a state in which the holding memory displayed in the form of holding a baggage is started to be digested (a state in which the symbol change is started). show. On the display screen 718, the left symbol 709L, the middle symbol 709C, and the right symbol 709R fluctuate at high speed. On the display screen 718, each hold memory display slides one from the state on the display screen 717, and the hold memory display in the form of holding the luggage that was located first in the hold display 713 is located on the hold digestion display 714. It is shown that the special figure variation display game corresponding to the hold memory displayed in the mode of holding the baggage has been started.

The display screen 719 shown in FIG. 86 (3) is a display screen after the display screen 718, and shows a state in which the opening effect of opening the baggage is being executed. The display screen 719 is a state in which an item of pattern P4 (a mode of a push button) appears from the baggage of the hold memory display displayed on the hold digestion display 714, and is a hold memory during digestion or a hold memory during standby. It is clearly stated that a pseudo-continuous production using push buttons will be performed in any of the special figure fluctuation display games. Further, on the display screen 719, the message "Thank you for the tribute!" Is displayed from the characters constituting the hold digestion pedestal display 715, thereby clearly indicating that the item is advantageous to the player.

The display screen 720 shown in FIG. 87 (1) is a display screen after the display screen 719, and is a state in which items appearing from the luggage are newly stocked in the notice display 716. On the display screen 720, the notice display 716 is in the display state because the item to be stocked has appeared, and the notice display 716 in the display state displays the item in the form of a push button that has appeared from the luggage. Then, on the display screen 720, as the item appears from the baggage, the mode of the hold memory display for displaying the hold memory during digestion is changed from the mode with the baggage to the mode without the baggage. The gaming machine 10 invalidates the input by pressing the push button (does not accept the input) while it is in the notice display 716.

The display screen 721 shown in FIG. 87 (2) is a display screen after the display screen 720, and is independent of the pseudo-continuous effect using the push button foretelled by the notice display 716 in the special figure variation display game (independent). The state in which the effect using the push button to be performed is occurring is shown.

The display screen 721 includes the effect display 722 as the display content. The effect display 722 displays the effect executed in the special figure variation display game. On the display screen 721, the effect display 722 includes an image showing how the push button is pressed (an image prompting the operation of the push button), a message "press !!" (a message prompting the operation of the push button), and the rest. A timer indicating the time is displayed, and it is clearly shown that the effect of using the push button (the effect of pressing the push button) is being executed in the special figure variation display game. On the display screen 721, the stock state (stocked items) of the notice display 716 has not changed from the stock state (stocked items) of the notice display 716 on the display screen 720. As a result, the display screen 721 is not related to the effect that the effect display 722 is foretelling in the notice display 716, that is, the effect using the push button being executed is irrelevant to the item in the form of the push button stocked in the notice display 716. It shows that.

Then, in the game machine 10, the player presses the push button (operation) while the display screen 721 is being displayed (when the effect using the push button is executed on the effect display 722 while the push button item is being displayed on the notice display 716). ), Only the operation for the effect display 722 (input by pressing) is valid (priority is given to the effect using the push button displayed by the effect display 722). That is, the gaming machine 10 invalidates the input by pressing the item in the form of the push button stocked in the notice display 716.

In this way, since the gaming machine 10 invalidates the input by pressing while it is displayed in the notice display 716, it does not cause a mixture of operations. Therefore, when the push button item is displayed on the notice display 716, the item and the item are displayed. There is no need to set restrictions such as prohibiting the performance of effects using push buttons that are performed independently. That is, the gaming machine 10 can secure the degree of freedom of the production (prevent the degree of freedom from decreasing) even during the advance notice, and can improve the interest.

In this case, the gaming machine 10 may change the display mode of the item in the push button mode displayed on the notice display 716 (for example, grayscale) to clearly indicate that the input by pressing is invalid. good.

The display screen 723 shown in FIG. 87 (3) is a display screen after the display screen 721, and shows a state in which the special figure variation display game is finished and the symbol variation is stopped.
On the display screen 723, the effect that the item stocked in the notice display 716 is not foretold in the special figure variation display game being executed on the display screen 721 is not performed (the stocked item is not consumed). Since the variable display game has ended, the stock state of the notice display 716 is the same as the stock state of the display screen 721.

The display screen 724 shown in FIG. 88 (1) is a display screen after the display screen 723, and shows a state in which the digestion of the new reserved memory is started (a state in which the fluctuation is started). On the display screen 724, each hold memory display slides by one from the state on the display screen 723, and the hold memory display located at the first position of the hold display 713 on the display screen 723 is located on the hold digestion display 714, and the hold is held. A special figure variation display game corresponding to the memory display has been started.

The display screen 725 shown in FIG. 88 (2) is a display screen after the display screen 724, and is in a state in which an effect corresponding to an item (an item in the form of a push button) stocked in the notice display 716 has been started. Is shown.

On the display screen 725, the items in the form of push buttons stocked in the notice display 716 are moving from the inside of the notice display 716 toward the center of the screen while expanding. As a result, the display screen 725 clearly indicates that the effect to be started from now on is the effect (pseudo-continuous effect using the push button) that the item in the mode of the push button has foretold.

The display screen 726 shown in FIG. 88 (3) is a display screen after the display screen 725, and is in a state in which an effect corresponding to the item (item in the form of a push button) stocked in the notice display 716 is being executed. Is shown.

On the display screen 726, as the effect display 722, an image showing how the push button is pressed, a message "press !!", and a timer indicating the remaining time are displayed, and the effect using the push button in the special figure variation display game is displayed. It is clearly stated that (the effect of pressing the push button) is being executed. On the display screen 726, the effect that the item stocked in the notice display 716 is foretelling is executed (the stocked item is consumed), and the notice is given as the items stocked in the notice display 716 are exhausted. The display 716 is hidden.

Next, in the pseudo-continuous production using the push button executed based on the item of the push button mode stocked in the notice display 716, the case where the input is made by pressing the push button and the case where the input is not made by pressing the push button. An example of the content of the production performed in FIG. 89 will be described with reference to FIG. 89. FIG. 89 is a diagram showing an example of the effect contents performed when the push button is pressed and when the push button is not pressed in the pseudo continuous effect using the push button in the third embodiment.

For example, as shown in FIG. 89A, when the gaming machine 10 does not input by pressing the push button in the pseudo-ream effect using the push button (when it is not pressed), the gaming machine 10 has a pseudo-ream in a normal mode. (Normal pseudo-ream) is executed, and when an input is made by pressing the push button in the production using the push button, the pseudo-ream (dedicated pseudo-ream) prepared exclusively for the pseudo-ream effect using the push button is executed. That is, the gaming machine 10 uses the push button to select the type of the pseudo-ream in the pseudo-ream effect using the push button.

Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 89 (b), the gaming machine 10 fluctuates at high speed (display screen) when no input is made by pressing the push button (when the push button is not pressed) in the pseudo-continuous production using the push button. (Variation shown in 720) is continued, and when an input is made by pressing the push button in an effect using the push button, a pseudo-ream is executed. That is, the gaming machine 10 uses the push button to select whether or not to execute the pseudo-continuous effect in the pseudo-continuous effect using the push button.

Next, the setting process of the luggage to appear in the hold storage display will be described with reference to FIG. 90. FIG. 90 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the luggage setting process according to the third embodiment.
The baggage setting process is a process performed when a new hold storage is generated by the control unit (CPU311) of the effect control device 300, that is, when a winning command indicating that the hold memory is newly generated is received. The baggage setting process is, for example, a process executed by the control unit in step D23 of the main process.

[Step D300] The control unit is an effect for which the effect executed by the newly generated hold memory based on the winning command is subject to the advance notice (the effect of executing the effect notified as the notice in the special figure variation display game). It is determined whether or not it is. The control unit proceeds to step D301 when it is determined that the effect subject to the advance notice is to be executed, and proceeds to step D307 when it is determined not to execute the effect subject to the advance notice.

[Step D301] The control unit determines whether or not there is a hold memory displayed in a mode of holding a load in the hold memory. The control unit proceeds to step D302 when it determines that there is a hold memory displayed in the mode of carrying the luggage, and step D304 when it determines that the hold memory displayed in the mode of the character carrying the luggage does not exist. Proceed to.

[Step D302] The control unit determines whether or not the contents of the hold storage baggage displayed in the mode of holding the baggage can be replaced. For example, the control unit determines that the replacement is possible when the pattern P1 is set as the content of the cargo, and determines that the replacement is not possible when the pattern P1 is set as the content other than the pattern P1. In addition, the priority is set for each pattern, the priority of the pattern before replacement is compared with the priority of the pattern after replacement, and it is determined that the replacement is possible when the priority of the pattern after replacement is high. You may.

The control unit proceeds to step D303 when it is determined that the contents of the luggage can be replaced, and proceeds to step D304 when it is determined that the contents of the luggage cannot be replaced.
[Step D303] The control unit replaces the contents of the baggage with the pattern of the item corresponding to the effect to be the target of the advance notice to be executed by the newly generated hold memory.

[Step D304] The control unit sets the baggage as the display mode of the hold storage display corresponding to any of the hold memory (newly generated hold memory or waiting hold memory) (the baggage is set as the display mode of the hold memory display). Set the character you have).

[Step D305] The control unit sets, as the contents of the baggage set in step D304, the pattern of the item corresponding to the effect to be the target of the advance notice to be executed by the newly generated hold memory.

[Step D306] The control unit determines whether or not the luggage has been set as the display mode of the hold storage display corresponding to the newly generated hold memory. When the control unit determines that the baggage has not been set as the display mode of the hold storage display corresponding to the newly generated hold memory, the control unit proceeds to step D307 and displays the hold memory display corresponding to the newly generated hold memory. If it is determined that the baggage has already been set as an aspect, the baggage setting process is terminated.

[Step D307] The control unit determines whether or not it is the time when the skull-filled luggage is generated. For example, the control unit generates a random number, and when the random number shows a predetermined value, it determines that it is the generation timing of the baggage containing the skull.

The control unit proceeds to step D308 when it is determined that it is the generation timing of the skull-filled luggage, and ends the luggage setting process when it is determined that it is not the generation timing of the skull-filled luggage.

[Step D308] The control unit sets a baggage as a display mode of the hold memory display corresponding to the newly generated hold memory (a character holding the baggage is set as a display mode of the hold memory display).

[Step D309] The control unit sets pattern P1 or pattern P5 (a treasure box containing a skull) as the contents of the baggage set in step D304, and ends the baggage setting process.

The above is the third embodiment. In this way, the gaming machine 10 predicts the progress of the effect by notifying in advance that the effect using the push button on the advance notice display 716 will be performed by either the hold memory during digestion or the hold memory during standby. It is possible to maintain and improve the feeling of expectation.

The game machine 10 has different hold memories for the hold memory for causing the item to appear and the hold memory for executing the effect announced by the item, so that the player cannot grasp the timing when the effect announced by the item occurs. According to this, the gaming machine 10 gives a feeling of expectation that the noticed effect may occur depending on the item even at the time of digesting the hold memory that is digested before the hold memory that performs the noticed effect. Can be done. That is, the gaming machine 10 can maintain and improve the sense of expectation even for the production that is not the target of the advance notice.

Further, the gaming machine 10 can prevent oversight (forgetting to operate) of the effect and improve the interest by notifying in advance that the effect using the push button will start by the advance notice display 716.

It should be noted that the gaming machine 10 has been described as not accepting input by pressing the push button item in the notice display 716, but the present invention is not limited to this. The gaming machine 10 may invalidate the input by pressing during the execution of the effect using the push button, which is performed independently of the pseudo continuous effect using the push button. As a reserved input, the input may be accepted before the start of the pseudo-continuous production. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can prevent the game machine 10 from missing the effect due to forgetting to press it.

[Modification 1 of the third embodiment]
Next, the effect performed in the first modification of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 92. FIG. 91 is a diagram (No. 1) showing an example of a display screen displayed by the display device in the first modification of the third embodiment. FIG. 92 is a diagram (No. 2) showing an example of a display screen displayed by the display device in the first modification of the third embodiment.

The display screen 727 shown in FIG. 91 (1) shows a display screen during symbol fluctuation (variation display game is being executed). On the display screen 727, the left symbol 709L, the middle symbol 709C, and the right symbol 709R fluctuate at high speed.

The display screen 728 shown in FIG. 91 (2) is a display screen after the display screen 727, and shows a state immediately before the left symbol 709L is temporarily stopped. On the display screen 728, the middle symbol 709C and the right symbol 709R fluctuate at high speed, and the left symbol 709L fluctuates at low speed. That is, the display screen 728 clearly indicates that the left symbol 709L is about to be temporarily stopped.

The display screen 729 shown in FIG. 91 (3) is a display screen after the display screen 728, and shows a state in which the left symbol 709L is temporarily stopped. On the display screen 729, the middle symbol 709C and the right symbol 709R fluctuate at high speed, the left symbol 709L temporarily stops at "5", and the symbols swing.

The display screen 730 shown in FIG. 92 (1) is a display screen after the display screen 729, and shows a state in which the effect is generated on the left symbol 709L.
On the display screen 730, the middle symbol 709C and the right symbol 709R fluctuate at high speed. Further, on the display screen 730, an image of the push button and an effect indicating the occurrence of the effect are displayed as the effect display 722 on the portion superimposed on the number (identifier) of the temporarily stopped left symbol 709L.

The display screen 731 shown in FIG. 92 (2) is a display screen after the display screen 730, and shows a state in which an effect using the push button is started.
On the display screen 731, as the effect display 722, an image showing how the push button is pressed, a message "press !!", and a timer indicating the remaining time are displayed, and the effect using the push button in the special figure variation display game is displayed. It is clearly stated that (the effect of pressing the push button) is being executed.

The above is the production performed in the first modification of the third embodiment. Generally, when a symbol is temporarily stopped in a variable display game, the player puts the temporarily stopped drawing in the field of view (visually). Therefore, the gaming machine 10 displays the image of the push button on the front side of the numbers constituting the temporarily stopped symbol immediately after the temporary stop, and uses the push button after notifying that the effect of using the push button is to be performed. By starting the production, it is possible to make the player more surely recognize that the production using the push button is started. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can prevent the player from overlooking the effect of using the push button, and can improve the interest.

[Modification 2 of the third embodiment]
In the first modification of the third embodiment, the image of the push button is displayed on the front side of the number of the symbol temporarily stopped after the temporary stop (changed to the symbol displaying the push button), and the effect of using the push button is performed. It started. In the second modification of the third embodiment, the changing symbol is replaced with a symbol that displays a push button (for example, a symbol that is arranged so that the push button is superimposed on the front side of the number), and the symbol that displays the push button is replaced. After the temporary stop, the production using the push button is started.

Here, the effect performed in the second modification of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 93. FIG. 93 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed by the display device in the second modification of the third embodiment.

The display screen 732 shown in FIG. 93 (1) is a display screen after the display screen 728, and shows a state immediately before the left symbol 709L is temporarily stopped. On the display screen 732, the middle symbol 709C and the right symbol 709R fluctuate at high speed, and the left symbol 709L fluctuates at low speed. Further, on the display screen 732, the left symbol 709L (the left symbol 709L in which the number is replaced with the symbol displaying the push button) in which the image of the push button is displayed on the front side of the numbers constituting the symbol is to be temporarily stopped (low speed). It is fluctuating). That is, the display screen 732 clearly indicates that the left symbol 709L is about to temporarily stop with the image of the push button displayed on the front side of the numbers constituting the symbol.

The display screen 733 shown in FIG. 93 (2) is a display screen after the display screen 732, and shows a state in which the left symbol 709L is temporarily stopped. On the display screen 733, the middle symbol 709C and the right symbol 709R fluctuate at high speed, and the left symbol 709L temporarily stops and swings with the image of the push button displayed on the front side of the numbers constituting the symbol.

The display screen 734 shown in FIG. 93 (3) is a display screen after the display screen 733, and shows a state in which the effect using the push button is started.
On the display screen 734, as the effect display 722, an image showing how the push button is pressed, a message "press !!", and a timer indicating the remaining time are displayed, and the effect using the push button in the special figure variation display game is displayed. It is clearly stated that (the effect of pressing the push button) is being executed.

The above is the effect performed in the second modification of the third embodiment. Generally, in a variable display game, a player has (visually) sees a drawing that is temporarily stopped. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 displays the image of the push button on the front side of the numbers constituting the temporarily stopped symbol immediately before the temporary stop (low-speed fluctuation state), and displays the image of the push button on the front side of the numbers constituting the symbol. By temporarily stopping the image while displaying it, notifying that the effect using the push button is to be performed, and then starting the effect using the push button, the player can more reliably recognize that the effect using the push button is started. Can be made to. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can prevent the player from overlooking the effect of using the push button, and can improve the interest.

[Modification 3 of the third embodiment]
Next, the effect performed in the third modification of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 94 to 97. FIG. 94 is a timing chart showing the flow of the effect in the third modification of the third embodiment. FIG. 95 is a diagram (No. 1) showing an example of a display screen displayed by the display device in the third modification of the third embodiment. FIG. 96 is a diagram (No. 2) showing an example of a display screen displayed by the display device in the third modification of the third embodiment. FIG. 97 is a diagram (No. 3) showing an example of a display screen displayed by the display device in the third modification of the third embodiment.

First, the flow of the effect will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. The timing chart shown in FIG. 94 is an example of the pseudo-ream effect executed by the gaming machine 10, and shows the flow of the effect when the pseudo-ream is executed three times.

As shown in FIG. 94, the gaming machine 10 starts the Nth variation display game using the music A as BGM (Back Ground Music) at the timing t10. Then, when the Nth variation display game is started, the gaming machine 10 executes the variation display effect (first pseudo-ream). An example of a display screen during the variable display effect (first pseudo-ream) will be described with reference to the display screen 735 of FIG. 95 (1) and the display screen 736 of FIG. 95 (2).

The display screen 735 shown in FIG. 95 (1) shows the display screen during the variable display effect (first pseudo-ream). On the display screen 735, the left symbol 709L, the middle symbol 709C, and the right symbol 709R fluctuate at high speed. Then, the gaming machine 10 plays BGM at a predetermined volume in accordance with the variable display effect being executed on the display screen 735.

The display screen 736 shown in FIG. 95 (2) is a display screen after the display screen 735, and shows the display screen during the variable display effect (first pseudo-ream). On the display screen 736, the left symbol 709L is temporarily stopped at the symbol "7", the right symbol 709R is about to be temporarily stopped at the symbol "7" (low speed fluctuation), and the middle symbol 709C fluctuates at high speed. doing. That is, the display screen 736 is trying to derive the reach state. Then, the gaming machine 10 plays BGM at a predetermined volume in accordance with the variable display effect being executed on the display screen 736, and operates the second board effect devices 705L and 705R to arouse the expectation of reach generation and improve the interest. I'm trying.

The gaming machine 10 starts an effect of notifying the player whether or not to continue the pseudo-ream (pseudo-ream continuation effect) when the two symbols are temporarily stopped in the variable display effect (first pseudo-ream) at the timing t11. .. At this time, the gaming machine 10 lowers the volume while playing the music A to mute (silence), and reproduces the SE (Sound Effect) used for the pseudo-continuous continuous production.

In the pseudo-ream continuation effect, the gaming machine 10 notifies the player that the pseudo-ream will be continued when the pseudo-ream is continued, and shifts to a state in which the three symbols fluctuate at high speed (variable display state). .. On the other hand, when the pseudo-ream is not continued, the gaming machine 10 shifts to the result derivation display or the like which notifies that the pseudo-ream is not continued and derives the result of the variable display game.

A screen display example during the temporary stop of the symbol (pseudo-continuous continuous effect) will be described with reference to the display screen 737 of FIG. 95 (3).
The display screen 737 shown in FIG. 95 (3) is a display screen after the display screen 736, and shows a display screen during the temporary stop of two symbols (pseudo continuous effect). On the display screen 737, the left symbol 709L is temporarily stopped at the symbol "7", the right symbol 709R is temporarily stopped at the symbol "6", and the middle symbol 709C is fluctuating at high speed. Then, the gaming machine 10 makes it possible to grasp that the production is occurring by muting the BGM and playing SE instead of the BGM in accordance with the pseudo-continuous continuous production being executed on the display screen 737, and a sense of expectation. To improve the interest.

When the gaming machine 10 notifies the timing t12 that the pseudo-ream is to be continued, the gaming machine 10 executes the variable display effect (second time). The gaming machine 10 stops the playback of the SE, and starts (returns to) the volume of the muted music A (BGM) at a predetermined volume. An example of a display screen during the variable display effect (second pseudo-ream) will be described with reference to the display screen 738 of FIG. 96 (1), the display screen 739 of FIG. 96 (2), and the display screen 740 of FIG. 96 (3).

The display screen 738 shown in FIG. 96 (1) is a display screen after the display screen 737, and shows the display screen during the variable display effect (second pseudo-ream). On the display screen 738, as the effect display 722, a character like a tiger and a message "The game is about to begin!" Are displayed, and the effect of the special figure variation display game is continued (re-variation starts). It is clearly stated. Further, the gaming machine 10 is trying to improve the interest by operating the second board effect devices 705L and 705R in accordance with the variable display effect being executed on the display screen 738 to change the effect. Then, the gaming machine 10 stops the SE being played on the display screen 737, and plays the BGM that has been muted at a predetermined volume.

The display screen 739 shown in FIG. 96 (2) is a display screen after the display screen 738, and shows the display screen during the variable display effect (second pseudo-ream). On the display screen 739, the left symbol 709L, the middle symbol 709C, and the right symbol 709R fluctuate at high speed. Then, the gaming machine 10 plays BGM at a predetermined volume in accordance with the variable display effect being executed on the display screen 739.

The display screen 740 shown in FIG. 96 (3) is a display screen after the display screen 739, and shows the display screen during the variable display effect (second pseudo-ream). On the display screen 740, the left symbol 709L is temporarily stopped at the symbol "7", the right symbol 709R is about to be temporarily stopped at the symbol "7" (low speed fluctuation), and the middle symbol 709C fluctuates at high speed. doing. That is, the display screen 740 is trying to derive the reach state. Then, the gaming machine 10 plays BGM at a predetermined volume in accordance with the variable display effect being executed on the display screen 740, and operates the second board effect devices 705L and 705R to arouse the expectation of reach generation and improve the interest. I'm trying.

The gaming machine 10 starts the pseudo-ream continuous effect when the two symbols are temporarily stopped in the variable display effect (second pseudo-ream) at the timing t13. At this time, the gaming machine 10 lowers the volume while playing the music A (BGM) to mute (silence), and reproduces the SE used for the pseudo-continuous continuous production. A screen display example during the temporary stop of the symbol (pseudo continuous effect) will be described with reference to the display screen 741 of FIG. 97 (1).

The display screen 741 shown in FIG. 97 (1) is a display screen after the display screen 740, and shows a display screen during the temporary stop of two symbols (pseudo continuous effect).
On the display screen 741, the left symbol 709L is temporarily stopped at the symbol "7", the right symbol 709R is temporarily stopped at the symbol "6", and the middle symbol 709C fluctuates at high speed. Then, the gaming machine 10 makes it possible to grasp that the production is occurring by muting the BGM and playing SE instead of the BGM in accordance with the pseudo-continuous continuous production being executed on the display screen 741, and a sense of expectation. To improve the interest.

When the gaming machine 10 notifies the timing t14 that the pseudo-ream is to be continued, the gaming machine 10 executes the variable display effect (third time). The gaming machine 10 stops the playback of the SE and starts playing (returning) the volume of the muted music A (BGM) at a predetermined volume. An example of a display screen during the variable display effect (third pseudo-ream) will be described with reference to the display screen 742 of FIG. 97 (2) and the display screen 743 of FIG. 97 (3).

The display screen 742 shown in FIG. 97 (2) is a display screen after the display screen 741 and shows the display screen during the variable display effect (third pseudo-ream). On the display screen 742, a character like a tiger and a message "I'll decide next!" Are displayed as the effect display 722, and the effect of the special figure variation display game is continued (re-variation starts). Is clearly stated. Further, the gaming machine 10 is trying to improve the interest by operating the second board effect devices 705L and 705R in accordance with the variable display effect being executed on the display screen 742 to change the effect. Then, the gaming machine 10 stops the SE being played on the display screen 741 and plays the BGM that has been muted at a predetermined volume.

The display screen 743 shown in FIG. 97 (3) is a display screen after the display screen 742, and shows a display screen during the variable display effect (second pseudo-ream). On the display screen 743, the left symbol 709L, the middle symbol 709C, and the right symbol 709R fluctuate at high speed. Then, the gaming machine 10 plays BGM at a predetermined volume in accordance with the variable display effect being executed on the display screen 743.

The gaming machine 10 executes the variation display effect (third time) up to the timing t15, derives the result of the variation display game (result derivation display), and displays the result for a predetermined time to play the Nth special figure variation display game. finish.

The above is the flow of the production in the modified example 3 of the third embodiment. As described above, in the case where the SE and the BGM are not mixed when the SE is reproduced, the gaming machine 10 does not put the BGM in the stopped state but puts the BGM in the mute state. As a result, when the gaming machine 10 raises the volume of the BGM after the reproduction of the SE is completed, the BGM can be heard from the reproduction position where the reproduction time of the SE has elapsed. By making it possible to hear the BGM from the playback position where the SE playback time is desired to elapse in this way, the gaming machine 10 prevents the BGM from being heard in pieces, suppresses the discomfort felt by the player, and improves the interest. can.

[Modification 4 of the third embodiment]
Next, a modification 4 of the third embodiment will be described. First, the decorative design used in the modified example 4 of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 98. FIG. 98 is a diagram showing an example of a decorative pattern in the modified example 4 of the third embodiment.

The gaming machine 10 uses decorative symbols A and decorative symbols B as decorative symbols used for each symbol of the large symbol group 709. The decorative symbol A is a decorative symbol mainly used, and the decorative symbol B is a decorative symbol used as a slave (a decorative symbol used only in a specific case). More specifically, in the gaming machine 10, the decorative symbol B is used only when a big hit is derived in the special figure variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) generated by winning a prize at the special figure 2 starting port. It is a design to be played.

The decorative symbol A includes symbols 744,745,746,747,748,749,750. The symbols 744,745,746,747,748,749,750 can be distinguished from other symbols by different display modes.

The symbol 744 is a symbol that displays a number "1" composed of a number element (identifier) having distinctiveness as a symbol by the number "1". The symbol 745 is a symbol that displays the number "2" composed of numerical elements having distinctiveness as a symbol by the number "2". The symbol 746 is a symbol that displays the number "3" composed of numerical elements having distinctiveness as a symbol by the number "3". The symbol 747 is a symbol that displays the number "4" composed of numerical elements having distinctiveness as a symbol by the number "4". The symbol 748 is a symbol that displays the number "5" composed of numerical elements having distinctiveness as a symbol by the number "5". The symbol 749 is a symbol that displays the number "6" composed of numerical elements having distinctiveness as a symbol by the number "6". The symbol 750 is a symbol that displays the number "7" composed of numerical elements having distinctiveness as a symbol by the number "7".

The decorative symbol B is a symbol having the same discriminating power as the numeric element in the decorative symbol A. For example, a character element (value conversion identifier) indicating that the numeric element in the decorative symbol A has a higher value than the decorative symbol A is added. It is an added form (a form in which a character element is added to the design 750). That is, in the gaming machine 10, the jackpot derived from the decorative symbol B (symbol 751) has a relatively higher value than the jackpot derived from the decorative symbol A (symbol 750).

The decorative symbol B includes the symbol 751. The symbol 751 is a character element indicating that the value is higher than that of the symbol 750, which is composed of only a number element (identifier) having the distinctiveness as a symbol by the number "7" and the number element of the number "7" by the character "pole". It is a pattern composed of and.

Next, the game state in which the decorative symbol A and the decorative symbol B are used will be described with reference to FIG. 99. FIG. 99 is a diagram showing a symbol used in the gaming state in the modified example 4 of the third embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 99, the game machine 10 has a different symbol from the special figure variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) generated by winning a prize at the special figure 1 start port and the special figure 2 variation display game. ing.

In the gaming machine 10, the symbol used during the fluctuation and temporary stop of the special figure 1 variable display game is composed of the decorative symbol A. That is, the gaming machine 10 fluctuates at high speed by displaying the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C in order of the symbols 744, 745, 746, 747, 748, 749, 750 in the special figure 1 variation display game. To temporarily stop any of the symbols 744, 745, 746, 747, 748, 749, and 750 on the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C, and display the temporary stop state.

In the gaming machine 10, the symbol used while the special figure 1 variable display game is stopped is composed of the decorative symbol A. That is, in the special figure 1 variable display game, the gaming machine 10 stops any of the symbols 744, 745, 746, 747, 748, 749, and 750 on the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C, and the derivation result is obtained. Is displayed.

In the gaming machine 10, the symbol used during the fluctuation and temporary stop of the special figure 2 variable display game is composed of the decorative symbol A. That is, in the special figure 2 variation display game, the gaming machine 10 displays the symbols 744, 745, 746, 747, 748, 749, 750 in order on the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C, thereby fluctuating at high speed. To temporarily stop any of the symbols 744, 745, 746, 747, 748, 749, and 750 on the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C, and display the temporary stop state.

In the gaming machine 10, the symbol used while the special figure 2 variable display game is stopped is composed of the decorative symbol A and the decorative symbol B. That is, in the special figure 2 variable display game, the gaming machine 10 stops any of the symbols 744,745,746,747,748,749,750,751 on the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C. Display the derivation result.

More specifically, when the gaming machine 10 derives a jackpot consisting of the symbol 751 in the special figure 2 variable display game, the game machine 10 has symbols 744,745,746,747,748 in the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C. , 749, 750 are displayed in order to perform high-speed fluctuation, and one of the symbols 744,745,746,747,748,749,750 is temporarily stopped on the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C. After that, the symbol 751 is stopped at the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C.

On the other hand, in the game machine 10, in other cases (when the jackpot consisting of the symbol 751 is not derived), the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C have symbols 744,745,746,747,748,749,750. Is displayed in order to perform high-speed fluctuation, and after temporarily stopping any of the symbols 744,745,746,747,748,749,750 on the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C, the left symbol One of the symbols 744, 745, 746, 747, 748, 749, 750 is stopped at the 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C, and the derivation result is displayed.

Hereinafter, in the game machine 10, in the special figure 2 variable display game, the jackpot consisting of the symbol 751 is derived instead of the jackpot consisting of the symbol 750. That is, in the game machine 10, it is assumed that the big hit consisting of the symbols 750 does not occur in the special figure 2 variable display game.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 uses the decorative symbol A (the symbol without the character element) during the fluctuation and the stop, and is decorated only when the special figure 2 variation display game derives the jackpot using the symbol 751. By using symbol B (a symbol with a character element), it is possible to easily grasp that the jackpot consisting of symbol 751 is a special jackpot (high-value jackpot), increase the understanding of the game, and improve the interest. Can be done.

Further, since the gaming machine 10 uses the decorative symbol A used during the fluctuation and the stop in the special figure 2 variable display game, the video and the like used during the fluctuation and the stop are displayed in the special figure 1 variable display game. It can be shared with the video, etc. in the above, and it is possible to suppress an increase in capacity, etc. and an increase in labor related to video preparation.

Next, the case of deriving the jackpot consisting of the symbol 750 in the special figure 1 variable display game and the case of deriving the jackpot consisting of the symbol 751 in the special figure 2 variable display game will be described with reference to FIG. 100. FIG. 100 is a diagram showing a comparison between the case where “777” is derived in the special figure 1 variable display game and the case where “777” is derived in the special figure 2 variable display game in the modified example 4 of the third embodiment. ..

First, a case where a jackpot consisting of symbols 750 is derived in the special figure 1 variable display game will be described. The gaming machine 10 derives a jackpot consisting of symbols 750 when the batch display device derives “●●● 〇 ● 〇〇 ●” in the special figure 1 variable display game. When the gaming machine 10 derives a jackpot consisting of the symbol 750, the gaming machine 10 grants "4R" to the player as a privilege. The gaming machine 10 temporarily stops the symbol 750 on the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C, and then stops the symbol 750 on the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C from the symbol 750. To derive the jackpot.

Next, a case where a jackpot consisting of the symbol 751 is derived in the special figure 2 variable display game will be described. The gaming machine 10 derives a jackpot consisting of the symbol 751 when the batch display device derives “●●● 〇 ● 〇〇 ●” in the special figure 2 variable display game. When the jackpot consisting of the symbol 751 is derived, the gaming machine 10 grants "16R" as a privilege to the player (grants a higher value than the jackpot consisting of the symbol 750 "777"). The gaming machine 10 temporarily stops the symbol 750 on the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C, and then temporarily stops the symbol 750 on the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C to the symbol 751. By replacing it, a big hit consisting of symbols 751 is derived.

In this way, in the gaming machine 10, when different values (rounds) are given by symbols displaying the same identifier, the symbols of the same embodiment are used in the temporary stop mode (result derivation process), and only when the result is derived. By using symbols of different modes (symbol 750, symbol 751) that display the same identifier, it is possible to easily grasp that the value of the jackpot consisting of each symbol is different, the degree of understanding of the game is improved, and the interest is improved. can.

Further, in the gaming machine 10, the value of the jackpot consisting of the symbols whose numbers are "7" is changed according to the type of the variable display game being executed (special figure 1 variable display game or special figure 2 variable display game). Therefore, it is possible to standardize the lighting pattern of the jackpot (“●●● 〇 ● 〇〇 ●”) consisting of the symbols whose numbers giving different values are “7” in the batch display device.

Next, the flow of the effect when deriving the jackpot consisting of the symbol 750 in the special figure 1 variable display game will be described with reference to FIG. 101. FIG. 101 is a diagram (No. 1) showing an example of a display screen displayed by the display device in the fourth modification of the third embodiment.

The display screen 752 shown in FIG. 101 (1) is a display screen in which the symbol variation is stopped (the variation display game is stopped), and shows a state before the special figure 1 variation display game is started. On the display screen 752, the left symbol 709L is stopped at "7", the middle symbol 709C is stopped at "3", and the right symbol 709R is stopped at "7". On the display screen 752, the special figure 1 hold number display 711 shows "3", the special figure 2 hold number display 712 shows "0", and there is only the hold memory that triggers the start of the special figure 1 variable display game. , Clarify that the special figure 1 variable display game will be played when the next reserved memory is exhausted.

The display screen 753 shown in FIG. 101 (2) is a display screen after the display screen 752, and shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable display game is started.
On the display screen 753, the left symbol 709L, the middle symbol 709C, and the right symbol 709R fluctuate at high speed. On the display screen 753, the special figure 1 hold number display 711 displaying "3" on the display screen 752 displays "2", and the variable display game being executed is the special figure 1 variable display game. It is shown that.

The display screen 754 shown in FIG. 101 (3) is a display screen after the display screen 753, and shows a state in which the three symbols are temporarily stopped in the special figure 1 variable display game.
On the display screen 754, the left symbol 709L is temporarily stopped at the symbol 750 (“7”), the middle symbol 709C is temporarily stopped at the symbol 750 (“7”), and the right symbol 709R is temporarily stopped at the symbol 750 (“7”), and a big hit is derived. It shows the situation just before the event.

The display screen 755 shown in FIG. 101 (4) is a display screen after the display screen 754, and shows a state in which the three symbols are stopped in the special figure 1 variable display game.
On the display screen 755, the left symbol 709L is stopped at the symbol 750 (“7”), the middle symbol 709C is stopped at the symbol 750 (“7”), and the right symbol 709R is stopped at the symbol 750 (“7”), and is composed of the symbol 750. The jackpot has been derived.

Next, the flow of the effect when deriving the jackpot consisting of the symbol 751 in the special figure 2 variable display game will be described with reference to FIG. 102. FIG. 102 is a diagram (No. 2) showing an example of a display screen displayed by the display device in the fourth modification of the third embodiment.

The display screen 756 shown in FIG. 102 (1) is a display screen in which the symbol variation is stopped (the variation display game is stopped), and shows a state before the special figure 2 variation display game is started. On the display screen 756, the left symbol 709L is stopped at "7", the middle symbol 709C is stopped at "3", and the right symbol 709R is stopped at "7". On the display screen 756, the special figure 1 hold number display 711 shows "0", the special figure 2 hold number display 712 shows "3", and there is only the hold memory that triggers the start of the special figure 2 variable display game. , Clarify that the special figure 2 variable display game will be played when the next reserved memory is exhausted.

The display screen 757 shown in FIG. 102 (2) is a display screen after the display screen 756, and shows a state in which the special figure 2 variable display game is started.
On the display screen 757, the left symbol 709L, the middle symbol 709C, and the right symbol 709R fluctuate at high speed. On the display screen 757, the special figure 2 hold number display 712 that displayed "3" on the display screen 756 displays "2", and the variable display game being executed is the special figure 2 variable display game. It is shown that.

The display screen 758 shown in FIG. 102 (3) is a display screen after the display screen 757, and shows a state in which the three symbols are temporarily stopped in the special figure 2 variable display game.
On the display screen 758, the left symbol 709L is temporarily stopped at the symbol 750 (“7”), the middle symbol 709C is temporarily stopped at the symbol 750 (“7”), and the right symbol 709R is temporarily stopped at the symbol 750 (“7”), and a big hit is derived. It shows the situation just before the event. In addition, while the display screen 758 is being displayed, the gaming machine 10 operates the second board effect devices 705L and 705R to change the effect, thereby arousing the expectation that further changes will occur and improving the interest. There is.

The display screen 759 shown in FIG. 102 (4) is a display screen after the display screen 758, and shows a state in which the three symbols are stopped in the special figure 2 variable display game.
On the display screen 759, the left symbol 709L is replaced from the symbol 750 to the symbol 751, the middle symbol 709C is replaced from the symbol 750 to the symbol 751, and the right symbol 709R is replaced from the symbol 750 to the symbol 751. , A jackpot consisting of the symbol 751 has been derived.

The above is the modified example 4 of the third embodiment. In addition, it is said that the decorative symbol B is a symbol used only when a big hit is derived in the special figure variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) generated by winning a prize at the special figure 2 starting port. No. For example, the gaming machine 10 may use the decorative symbol B (symbol 751) instead of the decorative symbol A (symbol 750) even at the time of stopping when the special figure 2 variable display game derives the deviation.

In the game machine 10, it has been described that the big hit consisting of the symbols 750 does not occur in the special figure 2 variable display game, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the special figure 2 variable display game, the gaming machine 10 can be configured to be able to derive a big hit consisting of the symbol 750 in addition to the big hit consisting of the symbol 751.

[Modification 5 of the third embodiment]
Next, a modification 5 of the third embodiment will be described. In the fourth modification of the third embodiment, the special figure 1 variable display game can generate a low-value jackpot consisting of symbols 750, and the special figure 2 variable display game can generate a high-value jackpot consisting of symbols 751. The embodiment is described. In the fifth modification of the third embodiment, a jackpot consisting of a low-value symbol 750 and a jackpot consisting of a high-value symbol 751 can be generated in each of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game. Will be described.

First, the symbols used in the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game will be described. FIG. 103 is a diagram showing a symbol used in the gaming state in the modified example 5 of the third embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 103, the gaming machine 10 uses the same symbols in the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game.
In the gaming machine 10, the symbols used during the variable and temporary stop of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are composed of decorative symbols A. That is, in the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game, the gaming machine 10 orders the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C in the order of symbols 744, 745, 746, 747, 748, 749, 750. The temporary stop state is displayed by temporarily stopping any of the symbols 744, 745, 746, 747, 748, 749, and 750 on the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C. ..

In the gaming machine 10, the symbols used while the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are stopped are composed of the decorative symbol A and the decorative symbol B. That is, in the special figure 2 variable display game, the gaming machine 10 stops any of the symbols 744,745,746,747,748,749,750,751 on the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C. Display the derivation result.

More specifically, when the game machine 10 derives the jackpot consisting of the symbol 751, the symbols 744,745,746,747,748,749,750 are sequentially arranged on the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C. By displaying, high-speed fluctuation is performed, and after temporarily stopping any of the symbols 744,745,746,747,748,749,750 on the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C, the left symbol 709L, right The symbol 751 is stopped at the symbol 709R and the middle symbol 709C.
On the other hand, in the game machine 10, in other cases (when the jackpot consisting of the symbol 751 is not derived), the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C have symbols 744,745,746,747,748,749,750. Is displayed in order to perform high-speed fluctuation, and after temporarily stopping any of the symbols 744,745,746,747,748,749,750 on the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C, the left symbol One of the symbols 744, 745, 746, 747, 748, 749, 750 is stopped at the 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C, and the derivation result is displayed.

Next, the case of deriving the jackpot consisting of the symbol 750 and the case of deriving the jackpot consisting of the symbol 751 will be described with reference to FIG. 104. FIG. 104 is a diagram showing a comparison of two jackpots in the modified example 5 of the third embodiment.

First, a jackpot consisting of symbols 750 derived in the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game will be described. When the gaming machine 10 derives a jackpot consisting of the symbol 750, the gaming machine 10 grants "4R" to the player as a privilege. The gaming machine 10 temporarily stops the symbol 750 on the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C, and then stops the symbol 750 on the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C from the symbol 750. To derive the jackpot.

Next, a jackpot consisting of the symbols 751 derived in the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game will be described. When the game machine 10 derives a jackpot consisting of the symbol 751, it grants "16R" to the player as a privilege. The gaming machine 10 temporarily stops the symbol 750 on the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C, and then temporarily stops the symbol 750 on the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C to the symbol 751. By replacing it, a big hit consisting of symbols 751 is derived.

The above is the modified example 5 of the third embodiment. In this way, the gaming machine 10 has a value from the state in which the symbol 750 is temporarily stopped (when it is suggested that the jackpot of "777" is confirmed) in each of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game. By making it possible to generate a jackpot consisting of a low symbol 750 and a jackpot consisting of a high-value symbol 751, it is possible to increase the variation of the jackpot while suppressing an increase in the capacity of the image or the like. In addition, the gaming machine 10 can maintain the player's interest in the production until the final stage of the production (even after the temporary stop).

Further, the gaming machine 10 uses the decorative symbol B (the symbol with the character element) only when the jackpot is stopped when the jackpot is derived, so that the jackpot consisting of the symbol 751 is a special jackpot (high-value jackpot). Can be easily grasped, the degree of understanding of the game can be improved, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification 6 of the third embodiment]
Next, a modification 6 of the third embodiment will be described. In the modified examples 4 and 5 of the third embodiment, an embodiment in which a decorative pattern composed of only numerical elements is used at the time of fluctuation and temporary stop has been described. In the sixth modification of the third embodiment, a case where a number element and a symbol including a character element and the like are used will be described. FIG. 105 is a diagram showing a transition of the symbol mode of the decorative symbol in the variable display game of the modified example 6 of the third embodiment. In this section, a symbol displaying "7" will be used as a representative.

As shown in FIG. 105, when the symbol is stopped (before the start of fluctuation), the gaming machine 10 uses the character symbol 760 (decorative symbol C) as the left symbol 709L, the middle symbol 709C, and the right symbol 709R. The decorative symbol C includes a character element having distinctiveness as a symbol by a character (for example, a character like a tiger in a symbol displaying the number "7") and a numerical element having distinctiveness as a symbol by a number. It is a symbol composed of inclusions.

When the game machine 10 starts to change the symbol, the symbol used as the left symbol 709L, the middle symbol 709C, and the right symbol 709R is changed from the character symbol 760 (decorative symbol C) to the character symbol 761 (decorative symbol D). The decorative symbol D has a base (fan) that has distinctiveness as a symbol by a pattern (for example, a pattern of a character like a tiger in a symbol that displays the number "7") and a distinctiveness as a symbol by a number. It is a design including a numerical element.

Then, after displaying the temporary stop state using the character symbol 761 (decorative symbol D) as the left symbol 709L, the middle symbol 709C, and the right symbol 709R, the gaming machine 10 is derived in the result derivation display (stop state). Depending on the result, the symbols used as the left symbol 709L, the middle symbol 709C, and the right symbol 709R are changed from the decorative symbol D to the decorative symbol C, the decorative symbol A, or the decorative symbol B.

Specifically, when the gaming machine 10 derives the outlier, the left symbol 709L, the middle symbol 709C, and the right symbol 709R are used to change the symbol from the decorative symbol D to the decorative symbol C, and a jackpot (for example, 4R) is derived. When changing the symbol from decorative symbol D to decorative symbol A as the left symbol 709L, middle symbol 709C, and right symbol 709R and deriving a high-value jackpot (for example, 16R), the left symbol 709L, middle symbol 709C, and right symbol As 709R, the design is changed from the decorative design D to the decorative design B.

According to this, since the gaming machine 10 uses the decorative symbol A and the decorative symbol B only when the jackpot is derived, the derivation result can be grasped by the symbol mode of the stopped symbol, and the degree of understanding of the game can be improved. It can be enhanced and the interest can be improved.

Further, the gaming machine 10 starts from a state in which the character symbol 761 (decorative symbol D) is temporarily stopped in the jackpot mode (when it is suggested that the jackpot is confirmed), and then from the jackpot consisting of the low-value symbols 750 and the high-value symbol 751. By making it possible to generate a big hit, it is possible to increase the variation of the big hit while suppressing the increase in the capacity of the video. In addition, the gaming machine 10 can maintain the player's interest in the production until the final stage of the production (even after the temporary stop).

The gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment (including the first to sixth modifications) described above has the following features on one side.
(1) The gaming machine 10 includes a display means (display device 41), an operating means (push button 25), and a control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300). The display means displays a game (variable display game). The operating means can accept a predetermined operation. The control means reserves the first operation effect (the effect display 722 of the display screen 726) that involves the operation of the operation means, and the second operation effect (display) is being executed while the reservation effect (display of the item of the pattern P4 on the notice display 716) is being executed. When the effect display 722) on the screen 721 is enabled and the operation of the operation means is received while the reserved effect and the second operation effect are being executed, the second operation effect of the first operation effect and the second operation effect is prioritized. And execute.

(2) When the control means of (1) receives the operation of the operation means at the timing when the reservation effect is being performed and the second operation effect is not being executed, the accepted operation is performed after the start of the first operation effect. Accept as a reservation operation.

(3) The control means of (1) changes the mode of the reservation effect during execution of the reservation effect and the second operation effect.
(4) The display means of (1) displays a hold memory indicating the right to execute the game, and the control means holds the hold memory when there is a game in the hold memory in which the first operation effect to be reserved is performed. The display means is displayed by the reservation effect that the first operation effect is performed in any of the games (display screen 719).

(5) The control means of (4) performs the reservation effect using the hold memory for executing the game before the hold memory for executing the game in which the first operation effect is performed.
(6) The control means of (5) changes the display mode of the hold memory for executing the game first in the reservation effect (display screen 719), so that the first operation effect can be performed in any of the games in the hold memory. Display what is being done on the display means.

(7) The gaming machine 10 includes a display means (display device 41), an operating means (push button 25), and a control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300). The display means displays a game (variable display game). The operating means can accept a predetermined operation. When the control means variablely displays the identification information (left symbol 709L, middle symbol 709C, right symbol 709R) in the game, and then displays the operation effect accompanied by the operation by the operation means on the display means after the identification information is variablely displayed. , Control to start the operation effect after displaying the display mode indicating the operation means at the position corresponding to the identification information.

(8) The gaming machine 10 includes a display means (display device 41) and control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300). The display means displays a game (variable display game). When the control means is to output the sound effect in the game when the BGM is played in the game, the volume of the BGM is muted while the sound effect is being output, and the volume of the BGM is turned off after the sound effect is output. Controls to return from the mute state.

(9) The gaming machine 10 includes a display means (display device 41) and control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300). The display means displays a game (variable display game). The control means variablely displays the first identification information (decorative symbol A) corresponding to the first value (4R jackpot) in the process of deriving the result of the game (at the time of fluctuation / temporary stop), and at the time of deriving the result of the game (at the time of deriving the result of the game (decorative symbol A). (At the time of stop), the first identification information (decorative symbol A) is given a conversion identifier (character element) for converting the first value into a second value (16R jackpot) larger than the first value. The display means is displayed to stop and display the second identification information (decorative symbol B) corresponding to the value of.

The above processing function can be realized by a computer. In that case, a program that describes the processing content of the function that the gaming machine of the embodiment should have is provided. By executing the program on a computer, the above processing function is realized on the computer. The program describing the processing content can be recorded on a computer-readable recording medium. Computer-readable recording media include magnetic storage devices, optical disks, opto-magnetic recording media, semiconductor memories, and the like. Magnetic storage devices include hard disk devices (HDD), flexible disks (FD), magnetic tapes, and the like. Optical discs include DVD (Digital Versatile Disk), DVD-RAM, CD (Compact Disk) -ROM / RW (ReWritable), and the like. The magneto-optical recording medium includes MO (Magneto-Optical disk) and the like.

When a program is distributed, for example, a portable recording medium such as a DVD or a CD-ROM on which the program is recorded is sold. It is also possible to store the program in the storage device of the server computer and transfer the program from the server computer to another computer via the network.

The computer that executes the program stores, for example, the program recorded on the portable recording medium or the program transferred from the server computer in its own storage device. Then, the computer reads the program from its own storage device and executes the processing according to the program. The computer can also read the program directly from the portable recording medium and execute the processing according to the program. In addition, the computer can sequentially execute processing according to the received program each time the program is transferred from the server computer connected via the network.

Further, at least a part of the above processing functions can be realized by an electronic circuit such as a DSP (Digital Signal Processor), an ASIC (Application Specific Integrated Circuit), or a PLD (Programmable Logic Device).

The gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine as shown in the disclosed embodiment as a gaming machine, and is not limited to, for example, other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, sparrow ball gaming machines, and the like. It is applicable to all gaming machines that use the above-mentioned gaming balls, and slot machines that are gaming machines that use medals.

Also, the disclosed embodiments should be considered to be exemplary in all respects and not restrictive. Further, each configuration of the above-described embodiment and modification may be applied in combination. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description, and it is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

10 Game machine 41 Display device 100 Game control device 300 Production control device

Claims (1)

It is equipped with a main control device that can set settings related to the game and controls the game, and a slave control device that controls the effect based on the command of the main control device.
The slave control device is
A first effect control unit capable of executing a suggestion effect suggesting the setting based on the command and a predetermined notification trigger .
A second effect control unit capable of executing a subordinate control effect different from the suggestion effect based on the command, and
A storage unit that stores table data that defines the distribution of the subordinate control effect,
Refer to the first control that controls the distribution of the subordinate control effect based on the first command of the commands by executing the first program that refers to the table data of one of the table data, and the table data of the first. By executing a second program different from the first program, the second control that controls the distribution of the subordinate control effect based on the second command different from the first command among the commands can be executed. With a control unit ,
Pachinko machine.

Images